advertisement
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-F (1211)MEE Printed in Japan
Specifications subject to change without notice.
F
INVERTER
FR-HC2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
High power factor converter
FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K to H560K
MON
P.CPY
REGEN
PWR
DRIVE
PSCLR
MODE
SET STOP
RESET
OUTLINE
INSTALLATION AND
WIRING
PARAMETERS
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
4
5
6
1
2
3
HC2.book 1 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi High Power Factor Converter.
This Instruction Manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this equipment. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the converter, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
Please forward this manual to the end user.
Safety Instructions
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the
2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION converter until you have read through this Instruction
The converter must be installed on a nonflammable wall
Manual and appended documents carefully and can use the without holes. Mounting it to or near flammable material equipment correctly. Do not use this product until you have can cause a fire.
a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and
If the converter has become faulty, the power of the instructions. converter must be switched OFF. A continuous flow of
In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are large current could cause a fire.
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION"
Daily and periodic inspections must be performed as instructed in the Instruction Manual. If the product is used
WARNING
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in without receiving any inspection, it may cause a burst, break, or fire.
death or severe injury.
3.Injury Prevention
CAUTION
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause
CAUTION
The voltage applied to each terminal must be the ones only material damage.
specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
The CAUTION level may even lead to a serious consequence according to conditions.
Both instruction levels must be followed because these are important to personal safety.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
The cables must be connected to the correct terminals.
Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
Polarity must be correct. Otherwise burst, damage, etc.
may occur.
While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not touch the converter, reactor 1, reactor 2, outside box, filter capacitor, and limit resistor as they will be extremely hot. Touching these devices can cause a burn.
4. Additional Instructions
While the converter power is ON, do not open the front cover or the wiring cover. Do not run the converter with the front cover or the wiring cover removed. Otherwise you may access the exposed high voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may accidentally touch the charged converter and get an electric shock.
Before wiring or inspection, power must be switched OFF.
To confirm that, LED indication of the operation panel must be checked. (It must be OFF.) Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection shall wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF and check that there is no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power OFF, and it is dangerous.
This converter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing
(grounding) must conform with the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical code
(NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this equipment shall be fully competent to do the work.
The product body must be installed before wiring.
Otherwise you may get an electric shock or be injured.
Setting dial and key operations must be performed with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not change the cooling fan while power is ON. It is dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is ON.
Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with wet hands. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
The following instructions must be also followed. If the product is handled incorrectly, it may cause unexpected fault, an injury, or an electric shock.
(1) Transportation and mounting
The product must be transported in a suitable method which corresponds to the weight. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
Do not stack the boxes containing products higher than the number recommended.
The product must be installed to the position where withstands the weight of the product according to the information in the Instruction Manual.
Do not install or operate the converter if it is damaged or has parts missing.
When carrying the converter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may fall off or fail.
Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
The mounting orientation must be correct.
Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering the converter. That includes screws and metal fragments or other flammable substance such as oil.
As the converter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.
The product must be used under the following environment. Otherwise the converter may be damaged.
Surrounding air temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Atmosphere
Altitude/ vibration
CAUTION
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1,000m above sea level. 5.9m/s
2
or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
2.9m/s 2 or less for the 160K or higher.
A-1
HC2.book 2 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(2) Trial run
CAUTION
Before starting the operation, each parameter must be confirmed and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause some machines to make unexpected motions.
Before starting the operation, the wiring of each peripheral device must be checked. Faulty wiring may cause some machines to make unexpected motions.
(3) Usage
WARNING
Any person must stay away from the equipment when the retry function is set as it will restart suddenly after a trip.
Since pressing the key may not stop the operation depending on the function setting status, separate circuit and switch that make an emergency stop (power OFF, etc.) must be provided.
OFF status of the inverter start signal must be confirmed before resetting a fault of the converter. If reset is performed with the start signal ON, the converter starts suddenly.
The load must be always inverters. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the converter output may damage the equipment.
Do not modify the equipment.
Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the product.
CAUTION
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the power input side for frequent starting/stopping of the converter or the inverter. Otherwise the life of the converter or the inverter decreases.
The effect of electromagnetic interference must be reduced by using a noise filter or by other means.
Otherwise the electronic equipment used near the converter or the inverter may be affected.
When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed, the required parameters must be set again before starting operations because all parameters return to the initial value.
Before running a converter or an inverter which had been stored for a long period, inspection and test operation must be performed.
Static electricity in your body must be discharged before you touch the product. Otherwise the product may be damaged.
(4) Emergency stop
CAUTION
A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent hazardous condition to the machine and equipment in case of the converter and inverter failure.
When the breaker, which is installed in the input side of the converter, trips, the wiring must be checked for a fault
(short circuit), and internal parts of the converter and the inverter for a damage, etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
When any fault occurs, take an appropriate corrective action, then reset the converter, and resume the operation.
(5) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the converter.
(6) Disposal
CAUTION
The converter must be treated as industrial waste.
(7) General instruction
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction
Manual show the converter without a cover or partially open for explanation. Never operate the converter in this manner.
The cover must be always reinstalled and the instruction in this Instruction Manual must be followed when operating the converter.
A-2
HC2.book I ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE 1
1.1 Pre-operation instructions ..................................................................2
1.2 Converter and peripheral devices.......................................................7
1.3 Precautions for selecting peripheral devices ....................................8
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 15
2.1 Removal and installation of the converter (FR-HC2) front cover.....16
2.4 Protruding the heatsink..................................................................... 21
2.5 Installation of peripheral devices .....................................................23
Installation of the outside box (FR-HCB2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H220K) ................... 24
Installation of MC power supply stepdown transformer (FR-HCM2-H280K to H560K) ................ 26
2.6 Main circuit terminal specifications.................................................27
(FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)...............................34
2.8 Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K).............................................41
2.9 Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)................................47
I
HC2.book II ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
2.10 Notes on earthing (grounding).......................................................... 53
2.11 Compatible inverter for the high power factor converter................ 54
2.12 Wiring of several inverters to one converter ................................... 56
3 PARAMETERS 65
3.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)....................................................... 66
3.4 Description of parameters................................................................ 75
II
HC2.book III ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.5 Parameter clear / All parameter clear ............................................ 120
3.6 Parameter copy and parameter verification...................................121
4 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 123
4.2 Reset method of protective function..............................................124
4.3 List of fault and alarm indications..................................................125
4.4 Causes and corrective actions .......................................................126
4.5 Correspondences between digital and actual characters.............133
4.6 Check and clear of the faults history .............................................134
4.7 Check first when you have a trouble ..............................................136
5 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 137
5.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers ....... 145
III
HC2.book IV ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
6 SPECIFICATIONS 147
6.1 Rated specifications ....................................................................... 148
6.2 Common specifications .................................................................. 149
6.3 Outline dimensions ......................................................................... 150
APPENDICES 187
Appendix 2 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives .............................. 189
<Abbreviations>
Converter: Mitsubishi high power factor converter (FR-HC2)
FR-HC2: Mitsubishi high power factor converter
Inverter: Mitsubishi inverter that supports FR-HC2
Reactor 1: Filter reactor 1 (FR-HC21)
Reactor 2: Filter reactor 2 (FR-HC22)
Limit resistor: Inrush current limit resistor (FR-HCR2)
Stepdown transformer: Stepdown transformer for power source of MCs
Limit MC: Inrush current limit MC
Pr. : Parameter number (Number assigned to function)
PU: Operation panel or option parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB)
FR-PU07: Option parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB)
PU operation: Operation using the PU
External operation: Operation using the control circuit signals
<Trademarks>
Microsoft and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
<Marks>
REMARKS : Additional helpful contents and relations with other functions are written.
Note : Contents requiring caution or cases when set functions are not activated are written.
POINT : Useful contents and points are written.
: Content and description of an alarm or fault are written.
IV
HC2.book 1 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
1 OUTLINE
This chapter explains the "OUTLINE" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Pre-operation instructions ........................................................... 2
Converter and peripheral devices ............................................... 7
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices ............................ 8
1
6
4
5
1
2
3
HC2.book 2 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Pre-operation instructions
1.1 Pre-operation instructions
Incorrect handling may cause the equipment to operate improperly, its life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the converter and inverter to be damaged. Please handle the unit properly in accordance with the information on each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual.
1.1.1
Features of FR-HC2 (high power factor converter)
Power supply harmonics generated from the converter part of an inverter may affect devices including a dynamo and a static capacitor. Power supply harmonics differ from noise and leakage current in their generating source, frequency range and transmission method. Power supply harmonic may be suppressed by using this converter, allowing the compliance with the harmonic suppression guideline issued by the former Japanese Ministry of International Trade and Industry (currently the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry). Conversion factor of the converter is K5=0 in the self-excitation three-phase bridge circuit.
REMARKS
Inverter parameters must be set.
The parameter settings differ by the inverter series. Refer to
Power supply harmonic suppression effect
(Example) FR-HC2-7.5K
(Condition) Load: 100%
Power factor: 1
[When the converter is not connected] [When the converter is connected]
Input phase voltage(100V/div)
Input phase voltage(100V/div)
Input phase current
(50A/div)
Input phase current
(50A/div)
NOTE
When the load is light, harmonic suppression effect declines.
When the power supply voltage is unstable, harmonics from electric power system flow in, making the harmonic current larger.
1.1.2
Japanese harmonic suppression guideline
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonics.
The all capacities and all models of the inverters used by the specific consumers became subject to the Harmonic
Suppression Guideline for the Consumers Who Receive High-voltage or Special High-voltage (hereafter referred to as
"Harmonic Suppression Guideline for Specific Consumers").
[Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers]
This guideline sets the maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents generated from a high-voltage or specially highvoltage consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values are exceeded, this guideline requires the consumer to take certain suppression measures.
Table 1 Maximum outgoing harmonic current per 1kW contract
Received Power
Voltage
6.6kV
22kV
33kV
5th
3.5
1.8
1.2
7th
2.5
1.3
0.86
11th
1.6
0.82
0.55
13th
1.3
0.69
0.46
17th
1.0
0.53
0.35
19th
0.9
0.47
0.32
23rd
0.76
0.39
0.26
Over 23rd
0.70
0.36
0.24
2
HC2.book 3 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Pre-operation instructions
(1) Application of the Harmonic Suppression Guideline for Specific Consumers
Install, add or renew equipment
Equal to or less than reference capacity
Calculation of equivalent capacity total
Equivalent capacity total
Above reference capacity
Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Not more than harmonic current upper
limit?
More than upper limit
Harmonic suppression measures necessary
Equal to or less than upper limit
Harmonic suppression measures unnecessary
Classification
3
5
Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-A700 Series
Three-phase bridge
(Capacitor smoothed)
Self-excitation three-phase bridge
Circuit Type
Without a reactor
With a reactor (on AC side)
With a reactor (on DC side)
Without a reactor (on AC/DC side)
With the converter
Conversion Factor Ki
K31=3.4
K32=1.8
K33=1.8
K34=1.4
K5=0
Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits
Received
Power Voltage
6.6kV
22/33kV
66kV or more
Reference
Capacity
50kVA
300kVA
2000kVA
Reactor
Not used
Used (AC side)
Used (DC side)
Used (on AC/DC side)
Table 4 Harmonic Content (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)
5th
65
38
30
28
7th
41
14.5
13
9.1
11th
8.5
7.4
8.4
7.2
13th
7.7
3.4
5.0
4.1
17th
4.3
3.2
4.7
3.2
19th
3.1
1.9
3.2
2.4
23rd
2.6
1.7
3.0
1.6
25th
1.8
1.3
2.2
1.4
(a) Calculation of equivalent capacity P0 of harmonic generating equipment
The "equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of a consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the following equation. When the sum of equivalent capacity exceeds the limits in Table 3, harmonics must be calculated in the following procedure.
P0 = (Ki Pi) [kVA]
Ki: Conversion factor(According to Table 2)
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment [kVA] i : Number indicating the conversion circuit type
Rated capacity: Rated capacity is determined by the capacity of the applied motor and found in Table 5. It should be noted that the rated capacity used here is used to calculate generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive.
(b) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Outgoing harmonic current=fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) operation ratio harmonic content
Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor operation time ratio during 30 minutes
Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.
1
3
HC2.book 4 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Pre-operation instructions
Applied
Motor
(kW)
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Table 5 Rated Capacity and Outgoing Harmonic Current during Inverter Run
Rated Current
[A]
200V 400V
49.8
61.4
73.1
98.0
121
147
180
1.61
2.74
5.50
7.93
13.0
19.1
25.6
36.9
24.9
30.7
36.6
49.0
60.4
73.5
89.9
0.81
1.37
2.75
3.96
6.50
9.55
12.8
18.5
Fundamental
Wave Current
Converted from
6.6kV (mA)
49
1860
2220
2970
3660
4450
5450
83
167
240
394
579
776
1121
1509
Rated
Capacity
(kVA)
17.6
21.8
25.9
34.7
42.8
52.1
63.7
0.57
0.97
1.95
2.81
4.61
6.77
9.07
13.1
5th
980.9
1209
1443
1931
2379
2893
3543
31.85
53.95
108.6
156.0
257.1
376.1
504.4
728.7
Harmonic Current Converted from 6.6kV (mA)
7th
618.7
762.6
910.2
1218
1501
1825
2235
20.09
34.03
68.47
98.40
161.5
237.4
318.2
459.6
(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
11th
128.3
158.1
188.7
252.5
311.1
378.3
463.3
4.165
7.055
14.20
20.40
33.49
49.22
65.96
95.29
13th
116.2
143.2
170.9
228.7
281.8
342.7
419.7
3.773
6.391
12.86
18.48
30.34
44.58
59.75
86.32
17th
64.89
79.98
95.46
127.7
157.4
191.4
234.4
2.107
3.569
7.181
10.32
16.94
24.90
33.37
48.20
19th
46.78
57.66
68.82
92.07
113.5
138.0
169.0
1.519
2.573
5.177
7.440
12.21
17.95
24.06
34.75
23rd
39.24
48.36
57.72
77.22
95.16
115.7
141.7
1.274
2.158
4.342
6.240
10.24
15.05
20.18
29.15
25th
27.16
33.48
39.96
53.46
65.88
80.10
98.10
0.882
1.494
3.006
4.320
7.092
10.42
13.97
20.18
Applied
Motor
(kW)
315
355
400
450
500
560
160
220
250
280
75
90
110
132
Rated Current
[A]
200V 400V
245
293
357
506
571
643
723
804
900
258
355
403
450
123
147
179
216
Fundamental
Wave Current
Converted from
6.6kV (mA)
7455
8909
10848
13091
15636
21515
24424
27273
30667
34606
38970
43818
48727
54545
Rated
Capacity
(kVA)
359
405
456
512
570
638
87.2
104
127
153
183
252
286
319
5th
9200
10382
11691
13146
14618
16364
2237
2673
3254
3927
4691
6455
7327
8182
Harmonic Current Converted from 6.6kV (mA)
(With a DC reactor, 100% operation ratio)
7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd
3987
4499
5066
5696
6335
7091
969
1158
1410
1702
2033
2797
3175
3545
2576
2907
3274
3681
4093
4582
626
748
911
1100
1313
1807
2052
2291
1533
1730
1949
2191
2436
2727
373
445
542
655
782
1076
1221
1364
1441
1627
1832
2060
2290
2564
350
419
510
615
735
1011
1148
1282
981
1107
1247
1402
1559
1746
500
688
782
873
239
285
347
419
920
1038
1169
1315
1462
1636
469
645
733
818
224
267
325
393
25th
675
761
857
964
1072
1200
344
473
537
600
164
196
239
288
(c)Deciding whether to take harmonic suppression measures
When the outgoing harmonic current > the maximum value per 1kW contract contract kW, a harmonic suppression measures are required.
(d) Harmonic suppression measures
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Item
Reactor
(FR-HAL, FR-HEL)
High power factor converter
(FR-HC2)
Power factor improving static capacitor
Multi-phase operation with transformers
Passive filter
(AC filter)
6 Active filter
Description
Harmonic current is suppressed by installing an AC reactor (FR-HAL) in the AC input side of the inverter or a DC reactor (FR-HEL) in the DC bus line of the inverter, or by installing both.
FR-HC2 is designed to switch ON/OFF the converter circuit to convert an input current waveform into a sine wave, suppressing the harmonic current considerably. The converter (FR-HC2) is used with the standard-equipped peripheral devices and accessories.
Using the power factor improving static capacitor with a series reactor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
Using two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 as in - and combinations provides an effect corresponding to 12 pulses and reduces low-degree harmonic currents.
A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedance at specific frequencies, producing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
This filter detects the current of the circuit, where harmonic current is generated, and generates the harmonic current equivalent to the difference between that current and a fundamental wave current.
By doing so, the harmonic current at where it was detected can be suppressed, and great absorption of harmonic current can be expected.
4
HC2.book 5 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Pre-operation instructions
1.1.3
Product checking and parts identification
Unpack the product and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the side to ensure that the model and rated output agree with your order and the product is intact.
When combined with a Mitsubishi general-purpose inverter and other converter accessories, this converter suppresses harmonics according to the harmonic suppression guideline of the former Japanese Ministry of International Trade and
Industry (currently the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry). Carefully check the specifications including the applicable capacities.
High power factor converter model
FR-HC27.5 K
Symbol Voltage class
Not used 200V class
H 400V class
Converter capacity
Represents the inverter capacity [kW]
PU connector
Alarm lamp
Lit when the converter is in fault.
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied with power.
Charge lamp
Lit when power is supplied to the main circuit
Dedicated circuit board for HC2
Main circuit terminal block
Control circuit terminal block
MON
P.CPY
REGEN
PWR
DRIVE
PSCLR
MODE
SET STOP
RESET
Operation panel
(FR-DU07-CNV)
Cooling fan
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the instruction manual of options.)
Front cover
Capacity plate
Capacity plate
FR-HC2-7.5K
Converter model name Serial number
Combed shaped wiring cover
Rating plate
Rating plate
Converter model name
Applicable inverter capacity
Input rating
FR-HC2-7.5K
Rated output
Serial number
1
5
HC2.book 6 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Pre-operation instructions
Checking peripheral devices
Peripheral devices
Always install the included peripheral devices. Check the model name of the each peripheral device.
For the 400V class peripheral devices, H is indicated in front of the model name.
FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K
Peripheral Device
Model Name
FR-HC2-(H) K
FR-HCL21-(H) K
FR-HCL22-(H) K
FR-HCB2-(H) K
Description
High power factor converter
Filter reactor 1
Filter reactor 2
Outside box
Quantity
1
1
1
1
Terminal screws are enclosed for FR-HCB2-7.5K, 15K, FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K. (M5 6)
FR-HC2-H280K to H560K
Peripheral
Device Model
Name
Model Name of Consisting Parts Description
FR-HC2-H K FR-HC2-H K
FR-HCL21-H K FR-HCL21-H K
High power factor converter
Filter reactor 1
FR-HCL22-H K FR-HCL22-H K
FR-HCC2-H K
Filter reactor 2
FR-HCC2-H K Filter
MDA-1 filter capacitor alarm detector
FR-HCR2-H K
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H21
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H31
Inrush current limit resistor (without thermostat)
Inrush current limit resistor (with thermostat)
1PH 630VA BKO-CA2001H06
S-N400FXYS AC200V 2A2B
S-N600FXYS AC210V 2A2B
SR-N4FX AC210V 4A
TS-807BXC-5P
MC power supply stepdown transformer
(400V-200V)
Inrush current limit MC
Inrush current limit MC
Buffer relay
Terminal block
Terminal block shorting conductor
MC shorting conductor
FR-HCM2-H K
C152C481H21
C152C423H21
MYQ4Z AC200/220
PYF14T
PYC-A1
M12 50 ZENNEJI
M12
Mini relay for filter capacitor alarm detector
Mini relay terminal block
Mini relay clip
MC shorting conductor bolt (M12 50)
MC shorting conductor nut (M12)
MIGAKI 12
BANE 12
SW-PW-P-NA M5 12
MC shorting conductor washer (flat washer)
MC shorting conductor washer (spring washer)
Inrush current limit resistor screw (M5 12)
Quantity
280K 400K 560K
—
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
—
—
—
—
1
1
6
2
15
3
1
2
1
1
1
2
24
24
48
24
54
—
6
1
1
3
—
2
—
3
15
3
1
3
1
1
1
2
24
24
48
24
54
1
1
—
6
3
—
2
—
Fan cover fixing screws (7.5K, 15K)
Use the screws to tighten the fan cover so that the cover will not open easily.
Eyebolt for hanging the converter
(30K to 75K (200V class), 30K to 110K and 280K (400V class))
Eyebolt Size Quantity
Model
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
FR-HC2-15K
Screw Size (mm) Quantity
M4 40
M4 50
2
1
Model
FR-HC2-30K, 55K
FR-HC2-H30K to H75K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H280K
M8
M10
M12
2
2
2
Instruction Manual
If you have any inquiry, or if damage is found on the product, please contact your sales representative.
6
HC2.book 7 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
1.2 Converter and peripheral devices
Converter and peripheral devices
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply specifications of the converter.
Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage current breaker (ELB), fuse
The breaker must be selected carefully since an inrush current flows in the converter at power ON.
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety.
Do not use this magnetic contactor to start and stop the high power factor converter and the inverter. Doing so will shorten the life of the inverter and the converter.
Reactor 1 (FR-HCL21)
Confirm that the capacity of the reactor is selected according to the capacity of the converter.
R4S4 T4
P N
Outside box (FR-HCB2)
∗
Check that the capacity of the outside box matches with the capacity of the high power factor converter.
∗
Outside box is not available for 280K or higher.
Connect filter capacitors, inrush current limit resistors, and magnetic contactors.
High power factor converter
(FR-HC2)
Install and wire correctly.
Do not install the moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) between terminals P and P, or N and N of the converter and the inverter.
Fuse
Installation of a fuse is recommended for safety.
Select a fuse according to the connected motor capacity.
Reactor 2 (FR-HCL22)
Confirm that the capacity of the reactor is selected according to the capacity of the converter.
Inverter
Confirm that this is a FR-HC2 supporting inverter. (Refer to the inverter catalogs for compatible inverters.)
Connect an inverter that corresponds with the each capacity of the converter.
Match the control logic (sink logic / source logic) of the converter and the inverter.
1
Devices connected to the output
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker.
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
Earth
(Ground)
Motor
Connect the motor corresponds to the each capacity.
7
HC2.book 8 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
1.3 Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
1.3.1
Measures against noises (EMI)
In this section, noises indicate those of more than 40th to 50th high frequencies in a power distribution system, which generally assume irregular conditions.
Some noises enter the converter to adversely affect it, and others are radiated by the converter to adversely affect peripheral devices. Though the converter is designed to be immune to noises, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the following basic measures. Also, since the converter chops input voltage at high carrier frequency, it could generate noises. If these noises affect peripheral devices, measures should be taken to suppress noises (EMI measures). The EMI measures differ slightly depending on the noise transmission paths.
(1) Basic measures
Do not place the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the converter in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
For the control signal cable and the connection cable with a detector, use twisted pair shield cables, and connect the sheath of the shielded cables to the terminal SD.
Ground (earth) the reactor 1, reactor 2, outside box, converter, etc. at one point.
(2) Measures against noises which enter and affect the converter
When devices, which generate many noises, (for example, magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays) are installed near the converter, the converter may malfunction because of the noises. In that case, the following measures must be taken.
Provide surge suppressors for the devices that generate many noises, and suppress the noises.
Install data line filters to signal cables.
Ground (earth) the connection cable with a detector and a control signal cable with a metal cable clamp.
(3) Measures against the noises that are radiated by the converter to affect peripheral devices
Noises radiated by the converter are largely classified into three types: those radiated by the cables connected to the converter and converter's main circuit (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit cable, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Converter generated noise
Air propagated noise
Noise directly radiated from the converter
Path 1)
Noise radiated from power supply cable
Path 2)
Noise radiated from motor connection cable
Path 3)
Electromagnetic induction noise
Electrostatic induction noise
Electrical path propagated noise
Path 4), 5)
Path 6)
Noise propagated through power supply cable
Noise from earth (ground) cable due to leakage current
Path 7)
Path 8)
Instrument
5)
7)
7)
Receiver
2)
1)
3)
Reactor 1
Outside box
Reactor 2
Converter
Inverter
4)
Sensor power supply
6) 1)
8)
Motor
IM
3) Sensor
Telephone
8
HC2.book 9 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
Noise
Transmission Path
1) 2) 3)
4) 5) 6)
7)
8)
Measures
When the devices, which handle low-level signals and are susceptible to noises (such as measuring instruments, receivers and sensors), are installed near or in the same enclosure with the converter, or their signal cables are placed near of in the same enclosure with the converter, the devices may malfunction due to air-propagated electromagnetic noises. In that cases, following measures must be taken.
(1) Install the easily affected devices as far away from the converter and inverter as possible.
(2) Place the easily affected signal cables as far away from the converter and inverter as possible.
(3) Do not place the signal cables and power cables (converter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4)Insert line noise filters ( FR-BLF, RC5128 (available product manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.)) and radio noise filters (FR-BIF) into the input side of the converter, and insert line noise filters (FR-BLF, RC5128
(available product manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.)) into the output side of the inverter to suppress cable-radiated noises.
(5) Use shield cables for signal cables and power cables and place them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects.
When the signal cables are placed in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be transmitted to the signal cables which causes the devices to malfunction. In that case, the following measures must be taken.
(1) Install the easily affected devices as far away from the converter and inverter as possible.
(2) Place the easily affected signal cables as far away from the converter, inverter, and their I/O cables as possible.
(3) Do not place the signal cables and power cables ( I/O cables of the converter and inverter) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Use shield cables for signal cables and power cables and place them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects.
When the peripheral devices are connected to the same power supply line with the converter, convertergenerated noises may flow back through the power supply cable to the devices, causing malfunction of the devices. In that case, the following measures must be taken.
(1) Install radio noise filters (FR-BIF) to the power cable (input cable) of the converter.
(2) Install the line noise filters (FR-BLF, RC5128 (available product manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.)) to the power cable (input cable) of the converter and to the power cable (output cable) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is configured by connecting the wiring of a peripheral device to the converter, leakage current may flow through the ground (earth) cable of the converter, causing malfunction of the device.
In that case, disconnecting the ground (earth) cable of the device may remove the malfunction.
EMC measures
Enclosure
Decrease carrier frequency
Install line noise filter
(FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) on the inverter output side
FR-
BLF
FR-
BLF M Motor
Power supply
Refer to
(grounding) the high power factor converter and accessories.
Separate the inverter and power line by more than
30cm (at least 10cm) from sensor circuit.
Control power supply
FR-
BIF
Power supply for sensor
Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as earth (ground) cable.
Use a shielded twisted pair cable
Sensor
Do not earth (ground) enclosure directly
Do not earth (ground) control cable
Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common cable.
1
9
HC2.book 10 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
(4) Using options to suppress noises
By using the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) and the line noise filter (FR-BLF), the noise radiated from the connection cable can be suppressed. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for the detail of the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) and the line noise filter (FR-BLF).
Example (FR-A700 series)
Line noise filter ∗1 ( FR-BLF, RC5128 ∗2 ) or
Radio noise filter (FR-BIF)
Line noise filter
(FR-BLF, RC5128 ∗2 )
Power supply
MCCB MC
Outside box (FR-HCB2)
FR-BIF
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21) R2/
L12
R/
L1
S/
L2
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
S2/
L22
T/
L3
T2/
L32
T2/
L32
Limit resistor
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
Limit MC1
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22)
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Filter capacitors
MC1
Auxiliary contact
(NO contact)
ROH1
Inrush current limit resistor overheat protection
Overheat detection thermostat for the limit resistor (NC contact)
ROH2
Contact input common
88R
MC connection terminal
88S MC connection terminal
Reset
Converter stop
Converter
(FR-HC2)
Inverter
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
ROH
SD
88R
88S
RES
SOF
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
U
V
W
P/+
N/-
P/+
N/-
RDY
RSO
C
B
A
Relay output
(fault output)
Inverter run enable signal
Converter reset
X10
RES
CVO
Y1
During converter run
Multi-purpose output 1
Y2
Multi-purpose output 2
SE
SD
Open collector output common
Y3 Multi-purpose output 3
Monitor switching X1
Monitor switching X2
SE2 Open collector output common
+
FM
-
Motor
Earth
(Ground)
Contact input common
24VDC power supply
(External transistor common)
SD
PU connector
SD
Indicator
PC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
AM
5
(+)
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
(-)
Install the line noise filter to the terminal R, S, and T of the converter, but not to the power supply. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the noise filter for the installation procedure of the noise filter.
Product available on the market ............ RC5128: manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.
NOTE
Configure a system where the magnetic contactor at the converter input side shuts off the power supply at a failure of the converter or the connected inverter. (The converter does not shut off the power supply by itself.)
Failure to do so may overheat and burn the resistors in the converter and the connected inverter.
10
HC2.book 11 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
1.3.2
Peripheral device list
(1) Circuit breakers and magnetic contactors
Check the model of the converter and select peripheral devices according to the capacity. Refer to the table below to prepare appropriate peripheral devices.
200V class
Converter Model
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
(NF, NV type)
Magnetic Contactor
(MC)
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
50A
75A
150A
300A
350A
S-N25
S-N50
S-N80
S-N180
S-N300
400V class
Converter Model
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H160K
FR-HC2-H220K
FR-HC2-H280K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HC2-H560K
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
(NF, NV type)
30A
50A
75A
150A
175A
250A
400A
500A
700A
900A
1500A
Magnetic Contactor
(MC)
S-N18
S-N20
S-N35
S-N80
S-N95
S-N180
S-N300
S-N400
S-N600
S-N800
S-N400 (three in parallel)
Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per converter.
MCCB Converter Inverter IM
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed fuse that is MCCB Converter Inverter IM suitable for branch circuit protection.
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class.The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 100,000 times.When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC with class
AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
NOTE
When the MCCB on the converter input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the converter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
1
11
HC2.book 12 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
(2) Fuse
Installation of a fuse is recommended between a high power factor converter and an inverter.
Select a fuse according to the capacity of the connected motor. When using a motor, of which the capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more, select the fuse with the capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity. ( Refer to
page 38, 45 and 51 for details.
)
[Fuse selection table]
200V class
Motor capacity (kW)
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
45
55
75
Fuse rating (A)
5
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
700
800
50
63
100
125
10
16
20
25
Model
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0005
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0010
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0016
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0020
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0025
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0050
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0063
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0100
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0125
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0160
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0200
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0250
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0315
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0400
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0500
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0630
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0700
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0800
Recommended fuse
Fuse holder (2 poles)
US102 (without fuse light melting indicator) or US102I (with fuse light melting indicator)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Manufacturer: Mersen Japan K.K.
Contact: Sun-Wa Technos Corporation
12
HC2.book 13 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
400V class
Motor capacity (kW)
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
90
110
132
160
185
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
Fuse rating (A)
250
315
350
450
125
125
160
200
500
550
630
800
900
30
50
50
80
12.5
16
16
20
1000
1250
1400
1600
1800
1800
2500
2700
2700
Recommended fuse
Model
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0012.5
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0016
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0016
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0020
6.900 CP GR 10.38 0030
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0050
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0050
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0080
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0125
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0125
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0160
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0200
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0250
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0315
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0350
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0450
6.9 URD 30 TTF 0500
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0550
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0630
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0800
6.9 URD 32 TTF 0900
6.9 URD 32 TTF 1000 or
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0630 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 33 TTF 1250 or
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0700 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 33 TTF 1400 or
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0800 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 232 TTF 1600 or
6.9 URD 31 TTF 0800 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 232 TTF 1800 or
6.9 URD 32 TTF 0900 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 232 TTF 1800 or
6.9 URD 32 TTF 0900 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 33 TTF 1250 2 in parallel
6.9 URD 32 TTF 0900 3 in parallel
6.9 URD 32 TTF 0900 3 in parallel
Fuse holder (2 poles)
US102 (without fuse light melting indicator) or US102I (with fuse light melting indicator)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Manufacturer: Mersen Japan K.K.
Contact: Sun-Wa Technos Corporation
When installing several fuses in parallel, leave 12mm or more between the fuses.
NOTE
Install a fuse across terminal P/+ of the inverter and the converter and across terminal N/- of the inverter and the converter.
[Estimated lifespan of fuse]
Part Name
Fuse
Estimated lifespan
10 years
Replacement method
Replace with a new one
Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 50°C (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
NOTE
If the fuse melts down, wiring failure such as a short circuit may be the cause. Identify the problem and fix it before replacing the fuse.
1
13
HC2.book 14 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Precautions for selecting peripheral devices
1.3.3
Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker
When using the earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows.
Breaker for harmonic and surge
Rated sensitivity current l n 10 (lg1 + lgn + lg2 + lg3 + lgm)
Standard breaker
Rated sensitivity current l n 10 { lg1 + lgn + lg2 + 3 (lg3 + lgm) } lg1, lg2, lg3 : leakage current of cable path during commercial power supply operation lgn : leakage current of noise filter on the converter input side lgm : leakage currents of motor during commercial
power supply operation
Example of leakage current of cable path per 1km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
(200V 60Hz)
2. 0
120
100
8 0
6 0
4 0
2 0
0
2 3.5
5.5
8 1422 38
30
80 150
60 100
Cable size (mm 2 )
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
0. 3
0. 2
Leakage current example of three-phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation
(200V 60Hz)
0. 1
1. 5 3. 7
2. 2
7. 5 1522
5.5
11 18. 5
37
30
55
45
Motor capacity (kW)
<Example>
Example of leakage current per 1km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
(Three-phase three-wire delta
connection 400V60Hz)
Leakage current example of threephase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation
(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
type motor 400V60Hz)
2. 0
120
100
8 0
6 0
4 0
2 0
0
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
0. 3
0. 2
2 3.5
5.5
8 1422 38
30 60
80 150
100
Cable size (mm 2 )
0. 1
1. 5 3. 7
2. 2
7. 5 1522
5.5
11 18. 5
37
30
55
45
Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
ELB
5.5mm
2 × 5m
Noise filter
Converter
5.5mm
2 × 5m
Inverter
5.5mm
2 × 70m
IM
3
φ
200V 2.2kW
lgm lg1 lgn lg2 lg3
Selection Example
(for the diagram shown on the left) (mA)
Breaker for harmonic and surge
Leakage current lg1 (mA)
Leakage current lgn (mA)
Leakage current lg2 (mA)
Standard breaker
33
1000m
=0.17
0 (without noise filter)
33
1000m
= 0.17
Leakage current lg3 (mA)
Leakage current lgm (mA)
Total leakage current (mA)
Rated sensitivity current
( lg 10)(mA)
33
1000m
= 2.31
0.18
2.83
7.81
30 100
NOTE
Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the converter.
In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against an earth (ground) fault in the inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding) must conform with the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is less than the rating.
In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
The following models are the standard breakers ....
BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, NV-2F earth leakage relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection
The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression ....
NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-
C2, earth leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H
14
HC2.book 15 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
2
INSTALLATION
This chapter provides an "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Protruding the heatsink................................................................ 21
Installation of peripheral devices ................................................ 23
Main circuit terminal specifications ............................................ 27
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K) ...................................... 41
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K) ......................... 47
2.10 Notes on earthing (grounding) .................................................... 53
2.11 Compatible inverter for the high power factor converter ......... 54
2.12 Wiring of several inverters to one converter.............................. 56
2.13 Wiring of control circuit ............................................................... 58
15
6
4
5
1
2
3
HC2.book 16 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Removal and installation of the converter (FR-HC2) front cover
2.1 Removal and installation of the converter (FR-HC2) front cover
Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two fixed screws on the operation panel.
(These screws cannot be removed.)
2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the screws of the operation panel.
15K or lower
Removal
1)Loosen the installation screws of the front cover.
2)Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover
Installation hook
Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. (Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted, make sure that a connector is securely fixed.)
3) Tighten the installation screws and fix the front cover.
P.CPY
MON
REGEN
PWR
DRIVE
Front cover
MON
P.CPY
REGEN
PWR
DRIVE
Front cover
MON
P.CPY
PWR
REGEN
DRIVE
Front cover
16
HC2.book 17 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Removal and installation of the converter (FR-HC2) front cover
30K or higher
Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover 1, and remove the front cover 1.
2) Loosen the installation screw of the front cover 2.
3) Push the two installation hooks on the right to remove, and pull the front cover toward you using the left fixed hooks as supports.
Installation hook
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the front cover 2 into the sockets of the body.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the front cover 2 against the body.
(Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted, make sure that a connector is securely fixed.)
Front cover 2
3) Tighten the installation screw of the front cover 2.
Front cover 2
4) Fit the front cover 1 and fix it with the installation screws.
2
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
REMARKS
For the 160K or higher, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
NOTE
Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the converter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the converter from where it was removed.
17
HC2.book 18 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Removal and installation of the outside box (FR-HCB2) front cover
2.2 Removal and installation of the outside box (FR-HCB2) front cover
Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover.
2) For removal, pull off the front cover.
Front cover
Front cover
Reinstallation
1) Securely press the front cover against the outside box.
2) Tighten the cover with mounting screws.
(Tightening torque: 1.7N m)
Front cover
Front cover
NOTE
Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the outside box.
Before reinstalling the front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the outside box from where it was removed.
18
HC2.book 19 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Installation
2.3 Installation
Incorrect installation and connection may cause the equipment to operate improperly and its lifespan to be reduced considerably. Please handle the unit properly in accordance with the information on each section as well as the precautions in this manual.
2.3.1
Converter placement
(1) Installation of the converter
Installation on the enclosure
7.5K, 15K
30K or higher
NOTE
When encasing multiple converters, install them in parallel as a cooling measure.
Install the converter vertically.
MON
P.CPY
PWR
REGEN
DRIVE
Vertical
Fix six points for 160K to 280K, and eight points for 400K and 560K.
Refer to the clearance on the next page.
The converter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
2
Direct sunlight
Vibration
(5.9m/s
2
or more at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X,
Y, Z axes))
2.9m/s
2
or more for the
160K or higher
High temperature, high humidity Horizontal placement
Vertical mounting
(When installing two or more converters, install them in parallel.)
Transportation by holding the front cover
Oil mist, flammable gas, corrosive gas, fluff, dust, etc.
Mounting to combustible material
19
HC2.book 20 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Installation
(2) Clearances around the converter
To ensure ease of heat radiation and maintenance, leave at least the shown clearance around the converter. At least the following clearance are required under the converter as a wiring space, and above the converter as a heat radiation space.
Surrounding air temperature and humidity
Measurement position
5cm Converter 5cm
55K or lower
Measurement position
5cm
Temperature:
-10°C to 50°C
Ambient humidity:
90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearance and take cooling measures.
5cm or more
Clearance (front)
10cm or more
5cm or more
75K or higher
10cm or more
10cm or more
20cm or more
20cm or more
Clearance (side)
5cm or more
Converter
REMARKS
For replacing the cooling fan of the 160K or higher, 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter. Refer to page
replacement.
(3) Converter mounting orientation
Mount the converter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.
(4) Above the converter
Heat is blown up from inside the converter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the converter should be heat resistant.
(5) Arrangement of multiple inverters and converters
When installing multiple inverters and converters in the same enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown in the right figure (a). When it is inevitable to arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as to provide guides since heat from the bottom converters can increase the temperatures in the top inverters, causing inverter failures.
Converter Inverter Inverter Inverter
Guide Guide Guide
When installing multiple inverters and converters, full caution must be taken not to let the surrounding air temperature of the converters and inverters exceed the permissible value. Avoid the temperature to exceed the value by providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure size, etc.
(6) Placement of ventilation fan and converter
Heat generated in the converter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow plates to expose the converter to cool air.)
Converter Converter
Enclosure Enclosure
(a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement
Arrangement of multiple inverters and converters
Converter Converter
<Good example> <Bad example>
Placement of ventilation fan and converter
20
HC2.book 21 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Protruding the heatsink
2.4 Protruding the heatsink
When installing a converter inside an enclosure, the heat generated in the enclosure can be greatly reduced by protruding the heatsink of the converter.
This installation method is recommended when downsizing the enclosure and such.
2.4.1
When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
For the FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K and FR-HC2-H7.5K to H110K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). (For the 160K or higher, the attachment is not necessary when the heatsink is to be protruded.)
Refer to the table below for the applicable heatsink protrusion attachments.
For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) to the converter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment".
Heatsink protrusion attachments
Model Name
FR-A7CN02
FR-A7CN03
FR-A7CN04
FR-A7CN05
FR-A7CN09
FR-A7CN12
FR-A7CN13
FR-A7CN14
Applicable converter
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H55K
2.4.2
Heatsink protrusion for 160K or higher
(1) Enclosure cut
Cut the enclosure according to the capacity of the converter.
FR-HC2-H160K, H220K FR-HC2-H280K
6-M10 screw
200
484
200
300
662
300
6-M10 screw
Hole
Hole 2
FR-HC2-H400K, H560K
315
771
315
6-M10 screw
Hole
21
HC2.book 22 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Protruding the heatsink
(2) Moving and removing the back installation frames
FR-HC2-H160K to H280K
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower parts of the converter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower sides of the converter to the front side as shown on the right. When changing the installation frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.
Shift Upper installation frame
FR-HC2-H400K, H560K
The converter has installation frames: two on the top and the two on the bottom. As shown on the right, remove the back installation frames on the top and bottom of the converter.
Shift
Removal
Lower installation frame
Upper installation frame (rear side)
Lower installation frame (rear side)
Removal
(3) Installing the converter to the enclosure
Protrude the heatsink of the converter from the installation enclosure, and secure the converter using the top and bottom installation frames.
Enclosure
Inside the enclosure
Exhausted air
Converter
∗
Installation frame
The enclosure enclosing FR-HC2-H160K and higher has a finger guard on its back. The thickness of the enclosure should be less than 10mm ( ), and do not place anything around the finger guard to avoid contact with the finger guard.
Enclosure
10
∗ 140
Finger guard
Cooling wind
D1
Dimension of the outside of the enclosure
Converter model
FR-HC2-H160K, H220K
FR-HC2-H280K to H560K
D1
185
184
NOTE
• Protruding area contains a cooling fan, so it cannot be used in the environment where water drops, oil mist, dust and other substances exist.
• Foreign substances such as screws and dust must be prevented to enter in the converter or the cooling fan section.
22
HC2.book 23 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Installation of peripheral devices
2.5 Installation of peripheral devices
2.5.1
Installation of reactor 1 and reactor 2
(1) Model name confirmation
Take caution as the appearances of the reactor 1 (FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22) are very similar.
Reactor 1(FR-HCL21)
AC REACTOR
MODEL
FR-HCL21-XXX
SERIAL XXXXX
Check "MODEL" on the rating plates of the reactor 1
(FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22).
MODEL
FR-HCL22-XXX
SERIAL XXXXX
Reactor 2(FR-HCL22)
AC REACTOR
(2) Clearance
Because the reactor 1 (FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22) generate heat, leave sufficient space around them.
10cm or more
5cm or more
5cm or more
(3) Installation place
Install the reactor 1 (FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22) on nonflammable material. Direct installation on a flammable material will cause a fire.
(4) Environment
Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt, etc.
Install the equipment in a clean place or protect them from suspended substances.
2
23
HC2.book 24 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Installation of peripheral devices
(5) Installation orientation
To prevent looseness, install the reactor 1 (FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22) on a horizontal surface securely with screws or bolts.
Do not install them on a vertical wall. Install them on a mounting stand which can withstand their weight.
NOTE
Since the charged sections of the reactor 1 and the reactor 2 are uncovered, fully protect them to prevent ground fault and electric shock.
2.5.2
Installation of the outside box (FR-HCB2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H220K)
(1) Clearance
10cm or more
5cm or more 5cm or more
10cm or more
(2) Installation area
Mount the outside box (FR-HCB2) on nonflammable material. Installing it directly on flammable material will cause a fire.
(3) Surrounding environment
Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt, etc.
Install the equipment in a clean place or protect it from suspended substances.
(4) Installation
Install the outside box (FR-HCB2) vertically.
NOTE
Since the charged sections of the outside box are uncovered, take sufficient protective measures to avoid ground faults and electric shocks.
Vertical
24
HC2.book 25 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Installation of peripheral devices
2.5.3
Installation of filter capacitor (FR-HCC2-H280K to H560K)
(1) Clearance
Because the filter capacitor (FR-HCC2) generates heat, leave sufficient space around it.
10cm or more
10cm or more 10cm or more
(2) Installation place
Install the filter capacitor on nonflammable material. Direct installation on a flammable material will cause a fire.
(3) Environment
Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt, etc.
Install the equipment in a clean place or protect them from suspended substances.
(4) Installation orientation
To prevent looseness, install the filter capacitor (FR-HCC2) on a horizontal surface securely with screws or bolts.
Do not install it on a vertical wall. Install it on a mounting stand which can withstand its weight.
Installation foot
NOTE
Since the charged sections of the filter capacitor is uncovered, fully protect it to prevent ground fault and electric shock.
(5) Installation of filter capacitor alarm detector (H400K, H560K)
To install a filter capacitor alarm detector (MDA-1), refer to the Instruction Manual appended to the filter capacitor alarm detector, and perform the installation.
2
2.5.4
Installation of inrush current limit resistor (FR-HCR2-H280K to H560K)
(1) Clearance
Because the limit resistor (FR-HCR2) generates heat, leave sufficient space around it.
3cm or more
3cm or more
3cm or more
(2) Installation place
Install the limit resistor (FR-HCR2) on nonflammable material. Installing directly on or near a flammable material will cause a fire.
25
HC2.book 26 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Installation of peripheral devices
(3) Environment
Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt, etc.
Install the equipment in a clean place or protect it from suspended substances.
Do not place a flammable material near the equipment.
(4) Installation orientation
To prevent looseness, install the inrush current limit resistor (FR-HCR2) on a horizontal or vertical surface securely with screws or bolts.
2.5.5
Installation of MC power supply stepdown transformer (FR-HCM2-H280K to H560K)
(1) Clearance
Because the MC power supply stepdown transformer generates heat, leave sufficient space around it.
10cm or more
10cm or more 10cm or more
(2) Installation place
Install the MC power supply stepdown transformer on nonflammable material. Direct installation on a flammable material will cause a fire.
(3) Environment
Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt, etc.
Install the equipment in a clean place or protect it from suspended substances.
(4) Installation orientation
To prevent looseness, install the MC power supply stepdown transformer on a horizontal or vertical surface securely with screws or bolts.
26
NOTE
Since the charged section of the MC power supply stepdown transformer is uncovered, fully protect it to prevent ground fault and electric shock.
HC2.book 27 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.6 Main circuit terminal specifications
2.6.1
Description of main circuit terminal
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Power input
R4/L14, S4/L24,
T4/L34
Power input
R1/L11, S1/L21
P/+, N/-
Power supply for control circuit
Inverter connection
Earth (Ground)
Description
These terminals are used to detect power phase and power voltage, and to input control power. Connect them to the commercial power supply. If the inverter is operated without connecting them to the commercial power supply, the converter will be damaged.
Connect them to the reactor 2.
These terminals are connected to the phase detection terminals R/L1 and S/L2 in the initial status. To retain the fault display and fault output, remove the jumpers (cables) and apply external power to these terminals.
Connect them to the inverter terminals P/+ and N/-.
For earthing (grounding) the converter chassis. It must be earthed (grounded).
2
27
HC2.book 28 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.6.2
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal
200V class
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
Charge lamp
∗ ∗
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/P/+
Screw size (M5)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw size
(M5)
Charge lamp Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M6)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
N/P/+
Screw size
(M6)
Power supply Reactor 2
Screw size for terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 is M4.
FR-HC2-30K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Inverter
Charge lamp
Power supply
FR-HC2-55K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Reactor 2
Charge lamp
Inverter
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M8)
Screw size
(M10)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw size
(M6)
Screw size
(M6)
N/P/+
FR-HC2-75K
Power supply
Reactor 2 Inverter
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Power supply
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M12)
R4/ S4/ T4/
0
Screw size
(M12)
2
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
N/P/+
Screw size
(M10)
Reactor 2 Inverter
28
Screw size
(M12)
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M12)
0 2
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
N/P/+
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Screw size
(M6)
Reactor 2 Power supply Inverter
HC2.book 29 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
400V class
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
Main circuit terminal specifications
FR-HC2-H30K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Charge lamp
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M5)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
Screw size
(M5)
Power supply Inverter
FR-HC2-H55K
Reactor 2
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4) Screw size (M6)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Screw size
R4/
L14
(M6)
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw
N/size
(M6)
P/+
Power supply Reactor 2
FR-HC2-H75K
Inverter
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size (M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Screw size
(M6)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw size
(M6)
N/P/+
Power supply Reactor 2 Inverter
Screw size (M10) Screw size (M10)
N/P/+
$%&*
$%&* R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw size
(M10)
R/ S/
L1 L2
T/
L3
Screw size
(M4)
Reactor 2 Power supply Inverter
2
29
HC2.book 30 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Main circuit terminal specifications
FR-HC2-H110K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
FR-HC2-H160K, H220K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M10)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Screw size
(M10)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
N/-
Screw size
(M10)
P/+
Power supply Reactor 2
FR-HC2-H280K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Inverter
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M12)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw size
(M10)
N/-
Screw size
(M10)
P/+
Power supply Reactor 2
FR-HC2-H400K, H560K
Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Inverter
Charge lamp
Screw size
(M4)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
Screw size
(M12)
T4/
L34 N/-
Screw size
(M10)
P/+
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
N/P/+
Inverter
Power supply
Reactor 2
Screw size (M12)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Screw size
(M10)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
N/-
N/-
P/+
Screw size
(M4)
P/+
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Reactor 2 Inverter Power supply
30
HC2.book 31 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.6.3
Cable sizes of the main control circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminals
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m
200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
<Converter (FR-HC2)>
Model Name
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
N m
Crimping
Terminal
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
T4/L34
P/+, N/-
M5
M6
2.5
4.4
8-5
22-6
5.5-5
14-6
M8/
M10(M6)
M12(M6)
7.8/14.7
(4.4)
60-8 38-10
24.5 (4.4) 100-12 100-12
M12(M10) 24.5 (14.7) 100-12 100-12
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
P/+, N/-
Earthing
T4/L34
cable
8
22
5.5
14
5.5
14
Cable Size
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
P/+, N/-
T4/L34
8
4
10
6
PVC, etc.(mm
2
)
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
P/+, N/-
Earthing
T4/L34
cable
10
25
6
16
6
16
60
100
100
38
100
100
22
38
38
1/0
4/0
4/0
1
4/0
4/0
50
95
95
50
95
95
25
50
50
<Outside box (FR-HCB2)>
Model Name
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
N
m
FR-HCB2-7.5K
FR-HCB2-15K
FR-HCB2-30K
FR-HCB2-55K
M5
M5
M6
M8(M6)
2.5
2.5
4.4
7.8 (4.4)
FR-HCB2-75K M12(M10) 24.5 (14.7)
Crimping
Terminal
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
8-5
22-5
60-6
125-8
100-12
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
Earthing cable
8
22
60
125
100
5.5
14
22
38
38
Cable Size
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
8
4
1/0
250
4/0
PVC, etc.(mm
2
)
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
Earthing cable
10
25
50
120
95
6
16
25
35
35
<Reactor1 (FR-HCL21)>
Model Name
FR-HCL21-7.5K
FR-HCL21-15K
FR-HCL21-30K
FR-HCL21-55K
FR-HCL21-75K
Terminal
Screw Size
M5
M6
M8
M12
M12
Tightening
Torque
N m
Crimping
Terminal
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R2/L12, S2/L22, T2/L32
2.5
4.4
7.8
24.5
24.5
8-5
22-6
60-8
125-12
100-12
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R2/L12, S2/L22, T2/L32
8
22
60
125
100
Cable Size
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R2/L12, S2/L22, T2/L32
8
4
1/0
250
4/0
PVC, etc.(mm
2
)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R2/L12, S2/L22, T2/L32
10
25
50
120
95
2
<Reactor2 (FR-HCL22)>
Model Name
FR-HCL22-7.5K
FR-HCL22-15K
FR-HCL22-30K
FR-HCL22-55K
FR-HCL22-75K
Terminal
Screw Size
M5
M6
M8
M12
M12
Tightening
Torque
N m
2.5
Crimping
Terminal
R3/L13, S3/L23, T3/L33
R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34
8-5
4.4
7.8
24.5
24.5
22-6
60-8
125-12
100-12
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R3/L13, S3/L23, T3/L33
R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34
8
22
60
125
100
Cable Size
R3/L13, S3/L23, T3/L33
R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34
8
4
1/0
250
4/0
PVC, etc.(mm
2
)
R3/L13, S3/L23, T3/L33
R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34
10
25
50
120
95
For the 55K or lower, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
75°C. It assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. (Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the 15K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. It assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. For the 30K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure. (Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
Screw size and tightening torque for earthing (grounding) are indicated in parentheses. (Refer to
page 53 for earthing (grounding)
.
)
If a cable thinner than the recommended cable size is used, it may not be protected by the DC fuse. (Refer to
for the fuse selection.)
31
HC2.book 32 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Main circuit terminal specifications
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
<Converter (FR-HC2)>
Model Name
Terminal
Screw Size
Crimping
Tightening
Torque
N m
Terminal
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
T4/L34
P/+, N/-
2.5
2.5
5.5-5
5.5-5
2-5
5.5-5
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
P/+, N/-
T4/L34
Earthing cable
Cable Size
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
T4/L34
P/+, N/-
3.5
5.5
2
5.5
3.5
5.5
12
10
14
10
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H110K
M5
M5
M6
M8(M6)
M10
M10
4.4
7.8(4.4)
14.7
14.7
22-6
60-8
38-10
60-10
14-6
38-6
38-10
60-10
22
60
38
60
14
38
38
60
FR-HC2-H160K M12(M10) 24.5(14.7) 100-12 150-12 100 125
FR-HC2-H220K
FR-HC2-H280K
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
24.5(14.7)
24.5(14.7)
150-12
200-12
100-12
150-12
150
200
2 100
2 125
FR-HC2-H400K M12(M10) 24.5(14.7) C2-200 C2-200 2 200 2 200
FR-HC2-H560K M12(M10) 24.5(14.7) C2-250 C2-250 2 250 3 250
38
38
60
14
22
38
38
60
100
4
1
1
1/0
6
2
1
2/0
4
6
PVC, etc.(mm
2
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
P/+, N/-
T4/L34
16
35
50
50
2.5
4
10
35
50
70
Earthing cable
16
25
25
35
4
6
4/0 250 95 120 70
300
400
2 250
2 300
150
185
150 95
2 120 120
2 400 2 400 2 185 2 185 2 95
2 500 2 600 2 240 3 240 2 150
<Outside box (FR-HCB2)>
Model Name
Terminal
Screw
Tightening
Torque
N m
FR-HCB2-H7.5K
FR-HCB2-H15K
M5
M5
FR-HCB2-H30K M5
FR-HCB2-H55K M8(M6)
FR-HCB2-H75K
FR-HCB2-H110K
M8
M10
2.5
2.5
2.5
7.8(4.4)
7.8
14.7
FR-HCB2-H160K M12(M10) 24.5(14.7)
FR-HCB2-H220K M12(M10) 24.5(14.7)
FR-HCC2-H280K M12(M8)
FR-HCC2-H400K M12(M8)
15.0(7.8)
15.0(7.8)
FR-HCC2-H560K M12(M8) 25.0(7.8)
Crimping
Terminal
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
5.5-5
5.5-5
22-5
60-8
38-8
60-10
100-12
150-12
60-12
60-12
38-12
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
Earthing cable
3.5
5.5
3.5
5.5
100
150
60
60
22
60
38
60
38
38
38
60
60
14
22
38
38
38
Cable Size
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
12
10
4/0
300
1/0
1/0
4
1
1
1/0
1
PVC, etc.(mm
2
R2/L12, S2/L22,
T2/L32 Earthing
R3/L13, S3/L23,
T3/L33
4
6 cable
4
6
95
150
50
50
16
35
50
50
50
70
95
50
50
16
25
25
25
50
<Reactor1 (FR-HCL21)>
Model Name
FR-HCL21-H7.5K
FR-HCL21-H15K
FR-HCL21-H30K
FR-HCL21-H55K
FR-HCL21-H75K
FR-HCL21-H110K
FR-HCL21-H160K
FR-HCL21-H220K
FR-HCL21-H280K
FR-HCL21-H400K
FR-HCL21-H560K
Terminal
Screw Size
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
Tightening
Torque
N m
1.5
2.5
4.4
7.8
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
Crimping
Terminal
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3
R2/L12,S2/L22,T2/L32
5.5-4
5.5-5
22-6
60-8
38-10
60-12
100-12
150-12
200-12
C2-200
C2-250
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3
R2/L12,S2/L22,T2/L32
3.5
5.5
22
60
38
60
100
150
200
2 200
2 250
Cable Size
AWG/MCM
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3
R2/L12,S2/L22,T2/L32
12
10
4
1
1
1/0
4/0
300
400
2 400
2 500
PVC, etc.(mm
2
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3
R2/L12,S2/L22,T2/L32
4
6
16
35
50
50
95
150
185
2 185
2 240
32
HC2.book 33 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Main circuit terminal specifications
<Reactor2 (FR-HCL22)>
Model Name
FR-HCL22-H7.5K
FR-HCL22-H15K
FR-HCL22-H30K
FR-HCL22-H55K
FR-HCL22-H75K
FR-HCL22-H110K
FR-HCL22-H160K
FR-HCL22-H220K
FR-HCL22-H280K
FR-HCL22-H400K
FR-HCL22-H560K
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
N m
M10
M10
M12
M12
M4
M5
M6
M8
M12
M12
M12
1.5
2.5
4.4
7.8
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
Crimping
Terminal
R3/L13,S3/L23,T3/L33
R4/L14,S4/L24,T4/L34
5.5-4
5.5-5
22-6
60-8
38-10
60-10
100-12
150-12
200-12
C2-200
C2-250
HIV, etc.(mm
2
)
R3/L13,S3/L23,T3/L33
R4/L14,S4/L24,T4/L34
3.5
5.5
22
60
38
60
100
150
200
2 200
2 250
Cable Size
AWG/MCM
R3/L13,S3/L23,T3/L33
R4/L14,S4/L24,T4/L34
12
10
4
1
1
1/0
4/0
300
400
2 400
2 500
PVC, etc.(mm
2
)
R3/L13,S3/L23,T3/L33
R4/L14,S4/L24,T4/L34
16
35
4
6
50
50
95
150
185
2 185
2 240
For the 55K or lower, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
For the 30K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the 30K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
Screw size and tightening torque for earthing (grounding) are indicated in parentheses. (Refer to page
If a cable thinner than the recommended cable size is used, it may not be protected by the DC fuse. (Refer to
for the fuse selection.)
2
33
HC2.book 34 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
2.7 Wiring of main circuit
(FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
Perform wiring securely to conform with the harmonic suppression guideline of the former Ministry of International
Trade and Industry (currently the Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry). Incorrect wiring causes the converter to display an alarm or causes an fault or damage.
Refer to the Instruction Manual of each inverter for the wiring of the inverter. Special attention must be paid to the wiring length and wire gauge.
2.7.1
Connection diagram (when using with the FR-A700 series)
Connection method differs by the inverter series. Perform connection by referring to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
Power supply
MCCB MC
Outside box (FR-HCB2)
Reactor1
(FR-HCL21)
R/
L1
S/
L2
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
T/
L3
T2/
L32
L32
Limit resistor
Filter capactors
Reactor2
(FR-HCL22)
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
Limit MC1
Auxiliary contact
(NO contact)
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
ROH1
Inrush current limit resistor overheat protection
MC power supply stepdown transformer
MC1
ROH2
Contact input common
88R
88S
MC connection terminal
MC connection terminal
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
ROH
SD
88R
88S
P/+
N/-
RDY
RSO
CVO
Y1
Y2
(7)
Fuses
C
B
A
Relay output
(fault output)
Inverter run enable signal
Converter reset
During converter run
Multi-purpose output 1
Multi-purpose output 2
X10
RES
SD
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
R1/L11
S1/L21
P/+
N/-
Reset RES
SE
Open collector output common
Converter stop SOF
Y3 Multi - purpose output 3
Overheat detection thermostat for the limit resistor (NC contact) Monitor switching X1 SE2 Open collector output common
Motor
Earth
(Ground)
Monitor switching X2
FM
+ -
Contact input common
24VDC power supply
(External transistor common)
SD
PC
PU connector
SD
AM
Indicator
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
5
(+)
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
(-)
Do not connect anything to the inverter power input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P and N will damage the converter and the inverter.
Use input terminal function selection to assign the terminal used for X10 signal. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)
The power phases of the terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 and the terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 must be matched.
Do not insert MCCB between terminals P and N (P and P, N and N).
Always connect the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 of the converter to the power supply. If the inverter is operated without connecting the terminals to the power supply, the converter will be damaged.
converter) of the above diagram. It will not operate properly.
Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
Installation of a fuse is recommended.
The MC power supply stepdown transformer is only equipped in the 400V class models.
Number
Wiring
Power supply and reactor 1
Reactor 1 and outside box
Outside box and reactor 2
Reactor 2 and converter
Converter and inverter
Reactor 1 and converter
Power supply and inverter
Outside box and converter
Refer to page
34
HC2.book 35 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
NOTE
• When connecting the converter to the inverter, match the control logic (sink logic (initial setting)/source logic). The converter does not operate properly if the control logic is different.
(Refer to
for the switching of the control logic. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter for the switching of the control logic of the inverter.)
• Keep the wiring length between terminals as short as possible.
• When sudden large distortion or depression of power supply occurs, reactor may generate abnormal acoustic noise.
This acoustic noise is caused by the power supply fault and not by the damage of the converter.
• Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
• When using a sine wave filter with FR-HC2 (75K or higher), select MT-BSL-HC as a reactor for the sine wave filter.
CAUTION
Check the connection order of the reactor 1 and the reactor 2. Incorrect connection may damage the converter and reactors.
Always connect the terminal RDY of the converter to the terminal MRS or the inverter terminal of which X10 signal is assigned to. Also, always connect the terminal SE of the converter to the terminal SD of the inverter. If these are not connected, the converter may be damaged.
2.7.2
Wiring of main circuit
(1) Wiring of power supply and reactor 1
• Cable size differs by capacity. Select an appropriate cable by referring to
and perform wiring.
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
Reactor 1
Power supply
MCCB MC
R/L1
Reactor 1
R2/L12
S/L2 S2/L22
T/L3 T2/L32
MCCB MC
R/L1 R2/
L12
S/L2 S2/
L22
T/L3 T2/
L32
2
Power supply
The terminal arrangement differs by capacity. Check the terminal arrangement on
Outline dimensions (refer to page 150) .
35
HC2.book 36 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
(2) Wiring of reactor 1 and outside box
• Cable size differs by the capacity. Select an appropriate cable by referring to
and perform wiring.
• The 400V class outside box is equipped with a MC power supply stepdown transformer. Switch the tap (V1, V2, V3) of the stepdown transformer according to the input power supply voltage as shown in the table below.
Power Supply Voltage
380V or more, less than 400V
400V or more, 440V or less
More than 440V, 460V or less
Switching Tap Position
V1
V2
V3
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
Reactor 1
R/L1 R2/L12
S/L2 S2/L22
T/L3 T2/L32
Outside box
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
Total wiring length
10m or less
R3/L13
S3/L23
T3/L33
• Outside box terminal screws
(accessory)
Reactor 1
R/L1 R2/
L12
S/L2 S2/
L22
T/L3 T2/
L32
(1)
(2)
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
(3)
R3 T3
Model
Screw size
Quantity
(ROH1) (ROH2)
S3
(88R) (88S)
FR-HCB2-7.5K, 15K
FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K
M5 6
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
Use the enclosed screws (M5) for the wiring of FR-
HCB2-7.5K, 15K and FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K.
Outside box
The terminal arrangement differs by capacity. Check the terminal arrangement on 6.3
Outline dimensions (refer to page 150) .
NOTE
• Because the reactor heats up, install the reactor in a place where the outside box will be unaffected by heat.
• Perform wiring where the wire sheath does not touch the reactor.
• Do not remove or wire the whirl-stop (shown on the right diagram) of the crimping terminals (R2/L12, S2/L22, T2/L32) of FR-HCB2-H160K and H220K.
Whirl-stop
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Whirl-stop
R2/
L12
36
HC2.book 37 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
(3) Wiring of outside box and reactor 2
• Cable size differs by capacity. Select an appropriate cable by referring to
and perform wiring.
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
Outside box
Outside box
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
Reactor 2
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Total wiring length
10m or less
(1)
(2)
(3)
Reactor 2
R2
(A2)
S2
(A1)
T2
• Outside box terminal screws
(accessory)
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Model
Screw size
Quantity
FR-HCB2-7.5K, 15K
FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K
M5 6
Use the enclosed screws (M5) for the wiring of FR-
HCB2-7.5K, 15K and FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K.
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
NOTE
• Do not remove or wire the whirl-stop (shown on the right diagram) of the crimping terminals (R3/L13, S3/L23, T3/L33) of FR-HCB2-H160K and H220K.
S3/
L23
Whirl-stop
R3/
L13
T3/
L33
Whirl-stop
(4) Wiring of reactor 2 and high power factor converter
• Cable size differs by capacity. Select an appropriate cable by referring to
and perform wiring.
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
Converter
2
Reactor2
Reactor 2
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Converter
R4/
L14
P/+
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
N/-
Total wiring length
10m or less
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
and 6.3 Outline dimensions (refer to page 150)
.
37
HC2.book 38 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
(5) Wiring of high power factor converter and inverter
• These units should be connected to transmit commands from the high power factor converter to the inverter securely.
Connection method differs depending on the inverter series. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter when connecting.
Refer to the below table for the wiring length.
For the wire gauge of the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- (across P and P, across N and N), refer to
.
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
P/+
N/-
T4/
L34
Control circuit
RDY
RSO
SE
∗1
Inverter
P/+
∗3
N/-
X10 ∗2
RES
SD
Cable gauge for the control circuit
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
0.75 to 1.25mm
2
Installation of a fuse is recommended to avoid the damage to spread in case of an inverter failure. Select a fuse according to the motor capacity. When using a motor, of which the capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more, select the fuse with the capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity. Refer to the fuse selection table on page
When connecting several inverters, the wire gauge of terminal P/+ and N/- should be same as the wire gauge of the inverter's power supply side. (Refer to the Instruction
Manual of the inverter.)
The function of the inverter terminal, which is connected to the terminal RDY of the converter, needs to be set at the inverter side.
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
Do not insert MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N).
Inverter
Converter
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/P/+
88R 88S A B C NC AM 5 X1 X2
NC NC NC RDY RSO CVO Y1 PC PC RES SOF ROH
NC NC NC NC SE SE SE Y2 PC FM SD SD SD
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R4
/L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
X10 RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM AM 1
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD SD STF STR JOG CS PC
N/P/+
88R 88S A B C NC AM 5 X1 X2
NC NC NC RDY RSO CVO Y1 PC PC RES SOF ROH
NC NC NC NC SE SE SE Y2 PC FM SD SD SD
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
X10 RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM AM 1
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD SD STF STR JOG CS PC
.
Total wiring length
Across terminals P and P
Across terminals N and N
Other control signal lines
50m or less
30m or less
NOTE
The converter operates as a common converter. Use terminals P/+ and N/- to connect it with the inverter. Do not connect anything to the inverter power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect connection to the inverter power input will damage the inverter. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the inverter and the converter.
Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
38
HC2.book 39 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
(6) Wiring reactor 1 and converter
Supply power to the power detecting terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) separately from the main circuit wiring.
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
Converter
Reactor 1
Power supply
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R/
L1
R2/
L12
S/
L2
S2/
L22
T/
L3
T2/
L32
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
Total wiring length
10m or less
Cable gauge 1.25mm
2
Jumper
(The jumper is connected inside the converter.)
Power supply
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/P/+
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R4
/L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
The terminal arrangement differs by capacity. Check the terminal arrangement on
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal (refer to page 28)
.
NOTE
The terminal R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 of the converter are control terminals to detect power supply phases of the power supply. The voltage phases of the terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 and the terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 must be matched. If these terminals are not connected correctly, the converter does not operate properly.
If the inverter is operated without connecting the terminals R, S, T of the converter to the power supply, the converter will be damaged.
(7) Wiring of the power supply and inverter
For the inverters equipped with the control circuit power supply terminals (R1/L11 and S1/L21), connect the control circuit power supply terminals (R1/L11 and S1/L21) directly to the power supply. Do not connect through the converter.
Power supply
MCCB
Inverter control power
R1/L11
S1/L21
R1/L11
S1/L21
2
Cable gauge 0.75 to 2mm 2
NOTE
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter, and remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1and R1/L11 and across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21 on the inverter main circuit.
For the inverters equipped with the control circuit power supply terminals (R1/L11 and S1/L21), always connect the power supply to the terminals. Inverter control power is provided. If not connected, the inverter may trip or be damaged.
Power supply and the inverter are not connected for the inverters not equipped with control circuit power supply terminals (R1/L11 and S1/L21).
39
HC2.book 40 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H220K)
(8) Wiring of outside box and high power factor converter
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection.
Cable gauge 0.75 to 1.25mm
2
Converter terminals ROH and SD are used for the control signal for the inrush current limit circuit inside the outside box.
Always connect them to the outside box. Failure to do so will cause internal circuit breakage of the outside box.
Connect the output from the MC start command terminals (88R, 88S) to the terminals (88R, 88S) of the outside box.
Outside box
ROH1
ROH2
88R
88S
Converter
ROH
SD
88R
88S
Total wiring length
10m or less
<Wiring example of 7.5K>
Outside box
Converter
(1)
(2)
(3)
R2
(A2)
S2
(A1)
T2
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/P/+
88R 88S A B C NC AM 5 X1 X2
NC NC NC RDY RSO CVO Y1 PC PC RES SOF ROH
NC NC NC NC SE SE SE Y2 PC FM SD SD SD
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R4
/L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
88R 88S A B C NC AM 5 X1 X2
NC NC NC RDY RSO CVO Y1 PC PC RES SOF ROH
NC NC NC NC SE SE SE Y2 PC FM SD SD SD
To 88R of the outside box
To 88S of the outside box
To ROH2 of the outside box
To ROH1 of the outside box
The terminal arrangement in the outside box differs by capacity. Check the terminal arrangement on
6.3 Outline dimensions (refer to page 150) .
40
HC2.book 41 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
2.8 Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
Perform wiring securely to conform with the harmonic suppression guideline of the former Ministry of International
Trade and Industry (currently the Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry). Incorrect wiring causes the converter to display an alarm or causes an fault or damage.
Refer to the Instruction Manual of each inverter for the wiring of the inverter. Special attention must be paid to the wiring length and wire gauge.
2.8.1
Connection diagram (when using with the FR-A700 series)
Connection method differs by the inverter series. Perform connection by referring to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
Power
Supply
MCCB MC
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21)
R/
L1
S/
L2
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T/
L3
T2/
L32
MC power supply stepdown transformer
Limit resistors
Filter capacitors
(FR-HCC2)
Auxiliary contact for limit MCs (NO contact)
Buffer relay for driving MC
MC
Converter
(FR-HC2)
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22)
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
Limit resistor
(with a thermostat) (NC contact)
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
P/+
N/-
Fuses
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
P/+
N/-
U
V
W
MC
Limit
MC
ROH
Inrush current limit resistor overheat protection
Contact input common
SD
C
B
A
Relay output
(Fault output)
MC
Bu1
MC connection terminal
MC connection terminal
Converter reset
Converter stop
Monitor switching
Monitor switching
Contact input common
24VDC power supply
(External transistor common)
88R
88S
RES
SOF
X1
X2
SD
PC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
RDY
RSO
CVO
Y1
Y2
SE
PU connector
Inverter run enable signal
Converter reset
During converter run
Multi-purpose output 1
Multi-purpose output 2
Open collector output common
X10
RES
SD
Y3 Multi - purpose output 3
SE2
Open collector output common
+ -
FM
SD
AM
5
Indicator
Motor
Earth
(Ground)
(+)
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
(-)
Do not connect anything to the inverter power input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the converter and the inverter.
Use input terminal function selection to assign the terminal used for X10 signal. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)
The power phases of the terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 and the terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 must be matched.
Do not insert MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N).
Always connect the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 of the converter to the power supply. If the inverter is operated without connecting the terminals to the power supply, the converter will be damaged.
converter) of the above diagram. It will not operate properly (except for the inrush current limit MC).
Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
Installation of a fuse is recommended.
Number
Wiring
Power supply and reactor 1
Reactor 1 and reactor 2
Reactor 2 and converter
Converter and inverter
Reactor 1 and converter
Power supply and inverter
Refer to page
2
41
HC2.book 42 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
NOTE
• When connecting the converter to the inverter, match the control logic (sink logic (initial setting)/source logic). The converter does not operate properly if the control logic is different.
(Refer to
for the switching of the control logic. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter for the switching of the control logic of the inverter.)
• Keep the wiring length between terminals as short as possible.
• When sudden large distortion or depression of power supply occurs, reactor may generate abnormal acoustic noise.
This acoustic noise is caused by the power supply fault and not by the damage of the converter.
• Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
• When using a sine wave filter with FR-HC2 (75K or higher), select MT-BSL-HC as a reactor for the sine wave filter.
CAUTION
Check the connection order of the reactor 1 and the reactor 2. Incorrect connection may damage the converter and reactors.
Always connect the terminal RDY of the converter to the terminal MRS or the inverter terminal of which X10 signal is assigned to. Also, always connect the terminal SE of the converter to the terminal SD of the inverter. If these are not connected, the converter may be damaged.
42
HC2.book 43 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
2.8.2
Wiring of main circuit
(1) Wiring power supply and reactor 1
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection.
Cable gauge 200mm
2
Use the moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) or the magnetic contactor (MC) shown in the below table.
MCCB MC
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type)
Magnetic Contactor (MC)
700A
S-N600
Power supply
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H280K)
R/
L1
R2/
L2
S/
L2
T/
L3
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
(2) Wiring reactor 1, filter capacitor, limit resistor, inrush current limit MC, and reactor 2
Limit resistor (with thermostat)
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H31
∗3
∗3
2)
∗1
∗2
∗3
∗3
Inrush current limit resistor
Connect the following devices to the appended terminal block:0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H21 (without thermostat)
3
Inrush current limit resistor (only S-phase)
Connect the following devices to the appended terminal block:
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H21 (without thermostat) 2
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H31 (with thermostat) 1
Appended terminal block and terminal block shorting conductor
∗3
∗1
∗3 thermostat output
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H280K)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Limit MC
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22-H280K)
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Converter
(FR-HC2-H280K)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
P/+
N/-
To inverter
3)
ROH
SD
FR-HCC2-H280K
1) Filter capacitor
2
Auxiliary contact for limit MCs (NO contact) 3
43
HC2.book 44 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
1) Filter capacitor
Install three filter capacitors in parallel to the output side of the reactor 1 or to the input side of the inrush current limit
MC as shown in the above diagram.
Use the cable shown in the table below for the connection of filter capacitor.
Cable gauge
Wiring length
60mm 2
2m or less
2) Limit resistor, inrush current limit MC
Install a pair of a limit resistor and a inrush current limit MC to the output side of the reactor 1, and install another pair of those to the input side of the reactor 2.
Install the limit resistor to the appended terminal block. Short a terminal block with a terminal block shorting conductor, and use them as a pair in each phase. Connect the appended terminal blocks to the appended inrush current limit MCs.
Connection example of inrush current limit MCs and limit resistors (of one phase)
Wire to the terminal block (22mm
2
)
Wire to the terminal block
Power cable
Crimping terminal
Crimping terminal
∗1
MC conductor
Inrush current limit MC
∗2
Appended terminal block
Appended terminal block shorting conductor
Inrush current limit MC
∗1 Make sure that the power cable touches the MC conductor.
∗2 Include one appended limit resistor with thermostat in the S-phase.
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection of each phase between the reactor 1 and reactor 2.
Cable gauge
Total wiring length
200mm
2
10m or less
3) Connecting limit resistor thermostats to the converter
Connect a limit resistor thermostat across the converter terminals ROH and SD.
(3) Wiring reactor 2 and converter
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection.
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22-H280K)
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Converter
(FR-HC2-H280K)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
P/+
N/-
Cable gauge
Total wiring length
200mm
2
10m or less
44
HC2.book 45 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
(4) Wiring example of converter and inverter
These units should be connected to transmit commands from the converter to the inverter securely.
Connection method differs depending on the inverter series. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter when connecting. Refer to the below table for the wiring length.
Across terminals P and P / terminals N and N
Other control signal lines
50m or less
30m or less
Converter
(FR-HC2-H280K)
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
P/+
N/-
Control
RDY circuit RSO
SE
∗1
Inverter
P/+
∗3
N/-
X10
∗2
RES
SD
Installation of a fuse is recommended to avoid the damage to spread in case of an inverter failure. Select a fuse according to the motor capacity. When using a motor, of which the capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more, select the fuse capacity according to the inverter capacity.
Refer to the fuse selection table on page 11
,
.
When connecting several inverters, the wire gauge of terminal P/+ and N/should be same as the wire gauge of the inverter's power supply side. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)
The function of the inverter terminal, which is connected to the terminal RDY of the converter, needs to be set at the inverter side.
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
Do not insert MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N).
Cable gauge for the control circuit
0.75 to 2mm
2
NOTE
The converter operates as a common converter. Use terminals P/+ and N/- to connect it with the inverter. Do not connect anything to the inverter power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect connection to the inverter power input will damage the inverter. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the inverter and the converter.
Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
(5) Wiring reactor 1 and converter
Supply power to the power detecting terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) separately from the main circuit wiring.
Switch the tap (V1, V2, V3) of the MC power supply stepdown transformer according to the input power supply voltage as shown in the below table.
Power Supply Voltage
380V or more, less than 400V
400V or more, 440V or less
More than 440V, 460V or less
Switching Tap Position
V1
V2
V3
Connect the MC start command terminals (88R, 88S) to the MC for the inrush current limit MC (for three phases) through the buffer relay.
Power
Supply
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H280K)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
MC
Limit MC
Converter
(FR-HC2-H280K)
R/L1
S/L2
V1
AC410V
V2
AC430V
V3
AC470V
R5/L15
S5/L25
Stepdown transformer (1PH 630VA)
MC
Bu1
Buffer relay for driving MCs
(SR-N4)
88R
88S
Total wiring length
Cable gauge
10m or less
1.25mm
2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
NOTE
The terminal R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter are control terminals to detect power supply phases of the power supply. The voltage phases of the terminals R4/L14, S4/L24 and T4/L34 and the terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 must be matched. If these terminals are not connected correctly, the converter does not operate properly.
If the inverter is operated without connecting the terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 of the converter to the power supply, the converter will be damaged.
2
45
HC2.book 46 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H280K)
(6) Wiring the power supply and inverter
Connect the inverter control power supply directly to the power supply without connecting a converter in between.
R1/L11
S1/L21
Power supply
MCCB
Inverter control power supply
R1
S1
Cable gauge 0.75 to 2mm 2
NOTE
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter, and remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21 in the inverter main circuit.
Always connect the power supply to the inverter. It supplies power to the inverter's control power and large-capacity cooling fan. If not connected, the inverter may come to a trip or be damaged.
46
HC2.book 47 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
2.9 Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
Perform wiring securely to conform with the harmonic suppression guideline of the former Ministry of International
Trade and Industry (currently the Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry). Incorrect wiring causes the converter to display an alarm or causes an fault or damage.
Refer to the Instruction Manual of each inverter for the wiring of the inverter. Special attention must be paid to the wiring length and wire gauge.
2.9.1
Connection diagram (when using with the FR-A700 series)
Connection method differs by the inverter series. Perform connection by referring to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
<Wiring example of 400K>
Power
Supply
MCCB MC
∗10
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21)
R/
L1
R2/
L12
S/
L2
S2/
L22
T/
L3
∗7
T2/
L32
MC power supply stepdown transformer
Limit resistor
Filter capacitors 2
(FR-HCC2)
∗9
Filter capacitor alarm detector
(NC contact) 2 ∗9
MC
Bu2
Buffer relay for filter capacitor alarm detectors
MC1 MC2 MC3
Limit MC
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22)
MC1
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
MC2
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
MC3
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
∗7
Limit resistor (with thermostat)
(NC contact) 3
MC1
MC2
MC3
MC
Bu1
Mini relay for filter capacitor alarm detector
Auxiliary contact for limit MCs (NO contact) 3
MC
Small
(7)
Reset
Converter stop
Monitor switching
Monitor switching
Contact input common
24VDC power supply
(External transistor common)
Buffer relay for driving MCs
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
∗3
P/+
N/-
Fuses ∗8
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2 ∗1
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
P/+
N/-
∗4
Inrush current limit resistor overheat protection
RDY
ROH
RSO
CVO
SD
Contact input common
Y1
Y2
RES
C
B
A
Relay output
(fault output)
Inverter run enable signal
Converter reset
During converter run
X10 ∗2
RES
Multi-purpose output 1
Multi-purpose output 2
SD
∗7
SOF
X1
X2
SD
PC
88R
88S
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
∗5
R1/L11
S1/L21
SE
Open collector output common
Y3 Multi-purpose output 3
SE2 Open collector output common
+ -
FM
PU connector
SD Indicator
∗7
AM
5
(+)
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
(-)
U
V
W
Motor
Earth
(Ground)
Do not connect anything to the inverter power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P and N will damage the converter and the inverter.
Use input terminal function selection to assign the terminal used for X10 signal. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)
The power phases of the terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 and the terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 must be matched.
Do not insert MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N).
Always connect the terminal R, S, and T of the converter to the power supply. If the inverter is operated without connecting the terminals to the power supply, the converter will be damaged.
the above diagram. It will not operate properly (except for the inrush current limit MC).
Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
Installation of a fuse is recommended.
Connect three sets consisting of one filter capacitor and one filter capacitor alarm detector for 560K.
For 560K, install a set of three MCs to each phase.
Number
Wiring
Power supply and reactor 1
Reactor 1 and reactor 2
Reactor 2 and converter
Converter and inverter
Reactor 1 and converter
Power supply and inverter
Filter capacitor alarm detector and converter
Refer to page
(Instruction Manual of the filter capacitor alarm detector)
2
47
HC2.book 48 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
NOTE
• When connecting the converter to the inverter, match the control logic (sink logic (initial setting)/source logic). The converter does not operate properly if the control logic is different.
(Refer to
for the switching of the control logic. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter for the switching of the control logic of the inverter.)
• Keep the wiring length between terminals as short as possible.
• When sudden large distortion or depression of power supply occurs, reactor may generate abnormal acoustic noise.
This acoustic noise is caused by the power supply fault and not by the damage of the converter.
• Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
• When using a sine wave filter with FR-HC2 (75K or higher), select MT-BSL-HC as a reactor for the sine wave filter.
CAUTION
Check the connection order of the reactor 1 and the reactor 2. Incorrect connection may damage the converter and reactors.
Always connect the terminal RDY of the converter to the terminal MRS or the inverter terminal of which X10 signal is assigned to. Also, always connect the terminal SE of the converter to the terminal SD of the inverter.
If these are not connected, the converter may be damaged.
2.9.2
Wiring of main circuit
(1) Wiring power supply and reactor 1
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection.
Model Name
FR-HCL21-H400K
FR-HCL21-H560K
Cable gauge (mm
2
)
2 200
2 250
Use the moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) or the magnetic contactor shown in the below table.
400K 560K
Power supply
MCCB MC
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H400K)
R/
L1
R2/
L12
S/
L2
T/
L3
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Power supply
MCCB
MC
MC
MC
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H560K)
R/
L1
R2/
L12
S/
L2
T/
L3
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Model Name
FR-HCL21-H400K
FR-HCL21-H560K
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type)
900A
1500A
Magnetic Contactor (MC)
S-N800
S-N400 (3 in parallel)
48
HC2.book 49 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
(2) Wiring reactor 1, filter capacitor, limit resistor, inrush current limit MC, and reactor 2
<Wiring example of 400K>
2) *1
<Wiring example of 560K>
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H400K)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
FR-HCC2-H400K FR-HCC2-H400K
1)Filter capacitors 2
Filter capacitor alarm detector (NC contact) 2
MC
Bu2
MC1 MC2 MC3
Buffer relay for filter capacitor alarm detector
Auxiliary contact for limit MCs (NO contact) 3
*2
Limit MC1
*2
*1
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22-H400K)
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
3)
Converter
(FR-HC2-H400K)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
P/+
N/-
To inverter
ROH
SD
*2
Limit MC2
*2
*1
*2
Limit MC3
*2
13
MC
Small
Mini relay for filter capacitor alarm detector
5
14
9
2) ∗1
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H560K)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
∗2
Limit MC1
∗2
∗1
FR-HCC2-H560K FR-HCC2-H560K FR-HCC2-H560K
1)Filter capacitors 3
Filter capacitor alarm detector (NC contact) 3 ∗2
Limit MC2
∗2
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22-H560K)
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
3)
Converter
(FR-HC2-H560K)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
P/+
N/-
To inverter
ROH
SD
2
MC
Bu2
MC1 MC2 MC3
Buffer relay for filter capacitor alarm detector
Auxiliary contact for limit MCs (NO contact) 3
∗1
13
MC
Small
Mini relay for filter capacitor alarm detector
5
14
9
Limit resistor
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H21 (without thermostat) 5
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H31 (with thermostat) 1
Connect them to each phase of the shorting conductors of the inrush current limit MCs.
MC shorting conductor
∗2
Limit MC3
∗2
Limit resistor (with thermostat)
0.96OHM BKO-CA1996H31 thermostat output
49
HC2.book 50 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
1) Filter capacitor
Install filter capacitors to the output side of the reactor 1 or to the input side of the inrush current limit MC as shown in the connection diagram on
Connect two units in parallel for 400K, and three units in parallel for 560K.
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection of filter capacitor.
Model Name
FR-HCC2-H400K
FR-HCC2-H560K
Cable gauge (mm 2 )
60
38
Wiring length
2m or less
2) Limit resistor, inrush current limit MC
Install a pair of a limit resistor and an inrush current limit MC to the output side of the reactor 1, and install another pair of those to the input side of the reactor 2.
Short three poles of the inrush current limit MC using the appended MC shorting conductors, and use that for one phase.
Before attaching an appended MC shorting conductor to an inrush current limit MC, remove the insulation barrier of the limit MC.
Connect six limit resistors in parallel to the shorting conductors of the inrush current limit MC at each phase. Apply a thermostat to at least one of the six limit resistors.
Inrush current limit MC
(Example of one phase)
MC shorting conductor
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection of each phase between the reactor 1 and reactor 2.
Cable gauge (mm 2 ) Total wiring length Model Name
FR-HCL21-H400K
FR-HCL22-H400K
FR-HCL21-H560K
FR-HCL22-H560K
2 200
2 250
10m or less
3) Connecting limit resistor thermostats to the converter
Wire the limit resistor thermostats in series at R-phase, S-phase, and T-phase so that the signals from the limit resistor thermostats are output into one line. In the wiring, also insert a mini relay so that the signal from the mini relay and the signals from the limit resistor thermostats are output to terminal ROH and SD of the converter as shown in the connection diagram on
(3) Wiring reactor 2 and converter
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection.
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL22)
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
P/+
N/-
Model Name
FR-HCL22-H400K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HCL22-H560K
FR-HC2-H560K
Cable gauge (mm
2
) Total wiring length
2 200
10m or less
2 250
50
HC2.book 51 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
(4) Wiring example of converter and inverter
These units should be connected to transmit commands from the converter to the inverter securely.
Connection method differs depending on the inverter series. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter when connecting. Refer to the below table for the wiring length.
Across terminals P and P / terminals N and N
Other control signal lines
50m or less
30m or less
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
P/+
N/-
Control
RDY circuit RSO
SE
∗1
Inverter
P/+
∗3
N/-
X10
∗2
RES
SD
Installation of a fuse is recommended to avoid the damage to spread in case of an inverter failure.
Select a fuse according to the motor capacity. When using a motor, of which the capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more, select the fuse capacity according to the inverter capacity. Refer to the fuse selection table on page
When connecting several inverters, perform wiring with the wire gauge of the inverter's power supply side for terminal P/+ and N/-. (Refer to the Instruction
Manual of the inverter.)
The function of the inverter terminal, which is connected to the terminal RDY of the converter, needs to be set at the inverter side.
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
Do not insert MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N).
Wire gauge for the control circuit
0.75 to 2mm
2
NOTE
The converter operates as a common converter. Use terminals P/+ and N/- to connect it with the inverter. Do not connect anything to the inverter power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect connection to the inverter power input will damage to the inverter. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the inverter and the converter.
• Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
(5) Wiring reactor 1 and converter
Supply power to the power detecting terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) separately from the main circuit wiring.
Switch the tap (V1, V2, V3) of the MC power supply stepdown transformer according to the input power supply voltage as shown in the below table.
Power Supply Voltage
380V or more, less than 400V
400V or more, 440V or less
More than 440V, 460V or less
Switching Tap Position
V1
V2
V3
Connect the MC start command terminals (88R, 88S) to the inrush current limit MC (for three phases) through the buffer relay.
Power
Supply
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21)
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
MC1
MC2
MC3
Inrush current limit MC
Converter
(FR-HC2)
R/L1 R5/L15
S/L2
V1
410VAC
V2
430VAC
V3
470VAC
S5/L25
MC
Bu1
88R
Stepdown transformer
(1PH 630VA)
Buffer relay for driving MCs
(SR-N4)
88S
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Total wiring length
Cable gauge
10m or less
1.25mm
2
R1/L11
S1/L21
NOTE
The terminal R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter are control terminals to detect power supply phases of the power supply. The voltage phases of the terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 and the terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 must be matched. If these terminals are not connected correctly, the converter does not operate properly.
If the inverter is operated without connecting the terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter to the power supply, the converter will be damaged.
2
51
HC2.book 52 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of main circuit (FR-HC2-H400K, H560K)
(6) Wiring the power supply and inverter
Connect the inverter control power supply directly to the power supply without connecting a converter in between.
R1/L11
S1/L21
Power supply
MCCB
Inverter control power supply
R1
S1
Cable gauge 0.75 to 2mm
2
NOTE
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter, and remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21 in the inverter main circuit.
Always connect the power supply to the inverter. It supplies power to the inverter's control power and large-capacity cooling fan. If not connected, the inverter may come to a trip or be damaged.
(7) Wiring filter capacitor alarm detector and converter
Use the cable shown in the below table for the connection.
Cable gauge 2mm 2
Before wiring, read the Instruction Manual appended to the filter capacitor alarm detector carefully.
<Wiring example of 400K>
Filter capacitors 2
(FR-HCC2-H400K)
Power
Supply
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H400K)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Filter capacitor alarm detector (NC contact) 2
Limit resistor (with thermostat)
(NC contact) 3
R/L1
S/L2
V1
AC410V
V2
AC430V
V3
AC470V
Stepdown transformer
(1PH 630VA)
R5/L15
S5/L25
MC
Bu2
Buffer relay for filter capacitor alarm detectors
(SR-N4)
MC1 MC2 MC3
Auxiliary contact for inrush current limit MCs
(NO contact) 3
MC
Small
Mini relay for filter capacitor
alarm detector
(MYQ4Z AC200/220)
Converter
(FR-HC2-H400K)
ROH
SD
<Wiring example of 560K>
Power
Supply
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL21-H560K)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
Filter capacitors 3
(FR-HCC2-H560K)
MC1 MC2
Limit resistor (with thermostat)
(NC contact) 3
MC3
Converter
(FR-HC2-H560K)
R5/L15
S5/L25
Filter capacitor alarm detector (NC contact) 3
R/L1
S/L2
V1
AC410V
V2
AC430V
V3
AC470V
MC
Bu2
MC
Small
ROH
SD
Stepdown transformer
(1PH 630VA)
Buffer relay for filter capacitor alarm detectors
(SR-N4)
Auxiliary contact for inrush current limit MCs
(NO contact) 3
Mini relay for filter capacitor
alarm detector
(MYQ4Z AC200/220)
Connect the wiring to the terminals R5/L15 and S5/L25 of the MC power supply stepdown transformer by placing parallel with the wiring of
1 and converter (Refer to page 51)
.
Install the mini relay using the provided mini relay terminal block (PYF14T) and the mini relay clip (PYC-A1).
52
HC2.book 53 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Notes on earthing (grounding)
2.10 Notes on earthing (grounding)
Always earth (ground) the converter with its accessories (reactor 1, reactor 2, outside box, filter capacitor).
(1) Purpose of earthing (grounding)
Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use.
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flow into the case. The purpose of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from getting an electric shock from this leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, this earthing (grounding) is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast.
(2) Earthing (grounding) methods and earthing (grounding) work
As described previously, earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noiseinfluenced malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be clearly distinguished, and the following work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the converter's high frequency components from entering the malfunction prevention type earthing (grounding):
(a) Independently earth (ground) the converter with its accessories whenever possible. If independent earthing
(grounding) (l) is not available, use (ll) common earthing (grounding) in the figure below where the converter is connected with the other equipment at an earthing (grounding) point.
Do not use the other equipment's earthing (grounding) cable to earth (ground) the converter as shown in (III).
A leakage current containing many high frequency components flows into the earthing (grounding) cables of the converter with its accessories. Because of this, the converter must be earthed (grounded) separately from EMIsensitive devices.
In a high building, it may be effective to use the EMI prevention type earthing (grounding) connecting to an iron structure frame, and electric shock prevention type earthing (grounding) with the independent earthing (grounding) together.
(b) This converter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
(c) Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. The earth (ground) cable size should be no less than the size indicated in the table on
(d) The converter with its accessories should have their earthing (grounding) points as close as possible to them, and their earthing (grounding) cables should be as short as possible.
(e) Run the earth (ground) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run them in parallel in the minimum distance.
Converter
(accessories)
Other equipment
Converter
(accessories)
Other equipment
Converter
(accessories)
Other equipment
2
(I) Independent earthing (grounding).......Good
(II) Common earthing (grounding).......Good
(III) Common earthing (grounding) cable .......Not allowed
(3) Earthing (grounding) of the reactor
(a) The reactor 1 and reactor 2 are usually earthed (grounded) by being mounted securely to the enclosure. If it cannot be earthed (grounded) securely enough to the enclosure, remove varnish from a mounting hole and use that hole and a cable to earth (ground).
(For the position of the varnish-removed mounting hole, refer to the outline dimensions.
)
(b) If the model is equipped with an earth (ground) terminal, wire the cable to that earth (ground) terminal. (Refer to the outline dimensions for presence/absence of the earth (ground) terminal.
)
(c) The earthing (grounding) cable size of the reactors should be the same as that of the high power factor converter.
(4) Earthing (grounding) example
Power supply M Motor
(e)
(d)
(a)
(b)
(c) : Earthing (grounding) cable
(a) Independently earth (ground) the converter with its accessories whenever possible.
(b) Wire the earthing (grounding) cable as close as possible to the input cable in parallel.
(c) Earth (ground) the high power factor converter with its accessory at one point. (Excluding when the reactors 1 and 2 are mounted on the enclosure surface.)
53
HC2.book 54 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Compatible inverter for the high power factor converter
(d) When the wiring length between the inverter and high power factor converter (between P and N) is long and they cannot be set in the same enclosure together, wire the earthing (grounding) cable between the inverter and the high power factor converter as close as possible to the wire between P and N in parallel.
When the wiring length is short and the inverter and the high power factor converter can be set in the same enclosure, earth (ground) them at one point as well as (c).
(e) For the earthing (grounding) of the motor, wire the earthing (grounding) cable through the inverter’s earthing
(grounding) terminal.
2.11 Compatible inverter for the high power factor converter
2.11.1 Applicable inverter capacity
Refer to the table below for the compatible inverter capacities when connecting one inverter to a converter. (Other combinations are not applicable.)
: Compatible
— : The converter can be used as a common converter or a regenerative converter, but its harmonic suppression effect reduces.
: Not compatible (Not applicable)
Inverter capacity
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
2.2K
or lower
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K
11K
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15K 18.5K
22K
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
30K
—
—
37K
45K
55K
75K
Inverter capacity
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H160K
FR-HC2-H220K
FR-HC2-H280K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HC2-H560K
Inverter capacity
FR-HC2-H280K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HC2-H560K
45K or lower
—
—
—
—
—
—
55K 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 200K
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
280K 315K 355K 375K 400K 450K 500K 530K 560K
—
220K
—
250K
—
54
HC2.book 55 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Compatible inverter for the high power factor converter
2.11.2 Inverter parameter settings
When using the converter with the inverter, some inverter parameters must be set. The parameter settings differ by the inverter series.
For the parameters and inverters not listed below, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection
V/F control
Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
Other than V/F control
Pr. 83 Rated motor voltage
Inverter series
FR-A700
FR-F700(P)
FR-E700
FR-F700PJ
FR-D700
2
0 (Initial value),
2 (when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is enabled)
Rated motor voltage
55
2
HC2.book 56 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of several inverters to one converter
2.12 Wiring of several inverters to one converter
Up to ten inverters can be connected to one converter. Be sure to use a converter with the capacity higher than the total capacities of inverters. Additionally, the total capacity of the inverters needs to be higher than half the converter capacity.
If the total inverter capacity is less than half the converter capacity, the converter can be used as a common converter or a regenerative converter. However, it's harmonic suppression effect reduces.
(1) Junction terminals or cross wiring are used to connect several inverters, so carefully select the wire gauge. Start adding the inverter capacities from the furthest inverter.
(2) When connecting several inverters, connect starting with the inverter with the highest capacity.
(3) Installation of a fuse, which corresponds with each motor capacity, is recommended for each inverter when connecting several inverters to one converter. Select a fuse according to the motor capacity.
When using a motor, of which capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more, select the converter capacity according to the inverter capacity.
(4) Keep the total wiring length within 50m.
Main circuit wiring example
The following diagram shows a connection example when connecting six inverters in total (FR-A720-30K, 15K, 5.5K, 2.2K,
1.5K, and 0.75K) to FR-HC2-55K.
FR-HC2
-55K
P
N
3)
1)
Junction terminal 1
Fuse
P
2)
N
INV1
A720
30K
30kW
Motor
Junction terminal 2
P
INV2
1st inverter 1) Wire gauge between FR-HC2 and the junction terminal 1 is 100mm 2 according to the FR-HC2 capacity.
2) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 1 and the inverter is 60mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 30K.
15kW
4)
N
A720
15K
5)
Junction terminal 3
6)
P
N
INV3
A720
5.5K
2nd inverter 3) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 1 and junction terminal 2 can be calculated as follows: 15+5.5+2.2+1.5+0.75=24.95K, and 24.95K rounds up to 30K, so the wire gauge is 60mm 2 .
4) The Wire gauge between the junction terminal 2 and the inverter is 22mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 15K.
5.5kW
Motor
7)
Junction terminal 4
P
INV4
3rd inverter 5) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 2 and junction terminal 3 can be calculated as follows: 5.5+2.2+1.5+0.75=9.95K, and 9.95K rounds up to
11K, so the wire gauge is 14mm 2 .
6) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 3 and the inverter is 14mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 5.5K.
2.2kW
8)
N
A720
2.2K
Motor
9)
Junction terminal 5
10)
P
N
INV5
A720
1.5K
4th inverter 7) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 3 and junction terminal 4 can be calculated as follows: 2.2+1.5+0.75=4.45K, and 4.45 K rounds up to 5.5K, so the wire gauge is 5.5mm
2 .
8) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 4 and the inverter is 2mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 2.2K.
1.5kW
Motor
11)
Junction terminal 6
12)
P
N
INV6
A720
0.75K
5th inverter 9) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 4 and junction terminal 5 can be calculated as follows: 1.5+0.75=2.25K, and 2.25K rounds down to
2.2K, so the wire gauge is 2mm 2 .
10) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 5 and the inverter is 2mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 1.5K.
0.75kW
Motor
6th inverter 11) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 5 and junction terminal 6 is
2mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 0.75K.
12) Wire gauge between the junction terminal 6 and the inverter is 2mm 2 because the inverter capacity is 0.75K.
56
HC2.book 57 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of several inverters to one converter
Example of control circuit wiring
RDY
RSO
FR-HC2
SE
INV1
X10
RES
A720
30K
SD
INV2
X10
RES
A720
15K
SD
INV3
X10
RES
A720
5.5K
SD
INV4
X10
RES
A720
2.2K
SD
INV5
X10
RES
A720
1.5K
SD
INV6
X10
RES
A720
0.75K
SD
For the control circuit wiring, use shielded or twisted wires, and separate the wire from the main circuit and high-voltage circuits.
Keep the total wiring length within 30m.
2
57
HC2.book 58 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
2.13 Wiring of control circuit
2.13.1 Description of control circuit terminal
Type
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 (input terminal function selection) and Pr. 11 to Pr. 16
(output terminal function selection)(Refer to page 76, 78)
(1) Input signal
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name Description Rated Specifications
RES
SOF
ROH
X1
X2
SD
PC
Reset
Converter stop
Inrush current limit resistor overheat protection
Monitor switching
Used to reset fault output provided when a fault occurs.
Turn ON the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it OFF.
Turning ON the SOF signal stops the converter.
RDY signal turns OFF, limit MC turns ON
200V class
7.5K to 75K
400V class
7.5K to 220K
Connect this terminal to terminal ROH1 of the outside box (FR-HCB2). The ROH signal is input to stop the converter operation when the limit resistor may overheat.
400V class
280K to 560K
An auxiliary contact (NO contact) of a limit resistor MC, a limit resistor (with thermostat)
(NC contact), and a filter capacitor alarm detector (NC contact, 400K, 560K) are connected to stop the converter operation when overheating of the limit resistor becomes a concern and when a filter capacitor is faulty.
FM and AM output or PU monitor display can be switched by a combination of ON/OFF of X1 signal and X2 signal.
Contact input common
(sink) (initial setting)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal
FM.
External transistor common (source)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such as a programmable controller in source logic, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
24VDC power supply common
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (terminal
PC).
Isolated from terminals 5, SE and SE2.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such
External transistor common
(sink) (initial setting) as a programmable controller in sink logic, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Contact input common (source)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic)
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
Input resistance : 4.7k
Voltage at opening: 21 to 27VDC
Contacts at shortcircuited: 4 to 6mADC
Power supply voltage range 19.2 to 28.8VDC
Permissible load current
100mA
58
HC2.book 59 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
(2) Output signal
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name Description
RDY
CVO
Y1
Y2
RSO
SE
FM
AM
5
A, B, C
Inverter run enable signal
Turns ON at alarm occurrence and reset (RES) signal input.
Connect this terminal to the terminal MRS or a terminal where the X10 signal is assigned to in the inverter.
Turning ON RDY signal stops the inverter.
RYD signal OFF: Inverter can run
RYD signal ON: Inverter cannot run
During converter run Signal is output during harmonic suppression.
Output item: OL signal (overload alarm) (initial setting)
Multi-purpose output
1
Turns ON at an occurrence of overcurrent (150% overload or more).
Multi-purpose output
2
Converter reset
Open collector output common
For meter
Analog signal output
Output item: PHS signal (power phase detection) (initial setting)
Turns ON when power phase detection is locked.
Turns ON at a converter reset (RES-ON).
Connect this terminal to the inverter terminal of which RES signal is assigned to.
Reset the connected inverter by turning ON the RSO.
Common terminal for the terminals RDY, CVO, OL, Y1, Y2
Connect it to the inverter terminal SD (sink logic).
Select one monitor item from multiple monitor items such as input current and bus voltage. Not output during a converter reset.
The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item.
Monitor item can be switched by ON/OFF of terminals X1 and
X2.
Analog signal output common
Common terminal for analog signal output
Fault contact
1 changeover contact output indicates that the converter's protective function is activated and the output is stopped.
Fault: No conduction across B and C (Conduction across A and C),
Normal: Conduction across B and C (No conduction across A and C)
88R, 88S
MC connection terminal
Controls the MC for the limit resistor.
Rated Specifications
Permissible load 24VDC
(27VDC maximum) 0.1A (A voltage drop is 2.8V maximum when the signal is ON.)
Permissible load current 2mA
At rated input current of the converter: 1440 pulses/s
Output signal 0 to 10VDC
Permissible load current 1mA
Load impedance 10k
Contact capacity AC230V
0.3A
(Power factor=0.4)
30VDC output 0.3A
(3) Output signals of FR-HC2 dedicated board
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name
Y3
Multi-purpose output
3
Description
Output item: Y5 signal (output voltage match) (initial setting)
Turns ON when the detected bus voltage equals to the commanded bus voltage.
Rated Specifications
Permissible load: 24VDC 0.1A
SE2
Open collector output common
Common terminal for terminal Y3
2
(4) Communication
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name
PU connector
Description
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
Conforming standard : EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format : Multidrop
Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
Overall length : 500m
USB connector and RS-485 terminal block cannot be used.
Refer to page
59
HC2.book 60 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
2.13.2 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control terminal must be moved to the other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
(1) Loosen the two installation screws at the both side of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Slide down the standard control circuit terminal block to remove it.
(2) Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to the source logic (SOURCE).
Jumper connector
(3) Using care not to bend the pins of the converter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the installation screws.
60
NOTE
• Make sure that the control circuit connector is installed correctly.
• While power is ON, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
HC2.book 61 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
(4) Sink logic and source logic
In the sink logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
In the source logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal when sink logic is selected
Sink logic
Current flow concerning the input/output signal when source logic is selected
Source logic
PC
Current
RES
R
Sink connector
Current
RES
R
Source connector
SOF
R
SOF
R
SD
Converter Inverter
Converter Inverter
PC
RES
R
Sink connector
RDY
X10
R
Source connector
RDY X10
R
SE
RES
R
SE SD
Current flow
Current flow
When using an external power supply for transistor output
Sink logic type
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of the converter with the terminal 0V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install an external power supply in parallel with the converter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
Source logic type
Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of the converter with the terminal +24V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install an external power supply in parallel with the converter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
Converter QY40P type transistor output unit TB1 RES
TB2 SOF
DC24V
(SD)
QY80 type transistor output unit
TB1
PC
Converter
RES
DC24V
(SD)
SOF
Constant voltage circuit
TB17
PC
TB18
DC24V SD
Current flow
TB2
Constant voltage circuit Fuse TB17
TB18 SD
Current flow
2
61
HC2.book 62 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
2.13.3 Control circuit terminal layout
Dedicated board for FR-HC2
5
IRL
NC
IRH
Y3
SE2
NC
TR1
TR2
IRO
MCO
RDO
RDI
Terminal screw size: M3
MCI
Terminals 5, IRH, IRL, TR1,
TR2, IRO, MCO, RDO, RDI, and MCI are for manufacturer setting. Keep them open.
88R 88S A B C NC AM 5 X1 X2
NC NC NC RDY RSO CVO Y1 PC PC RES SOF ROH
NC NC NC NC SE SE SE Y2 PC FM SD SD SD
Terminal screw size: M3.5
(1) Common terminals of the control circuit (SD, 5, SE, SE2)
Terminals SD, 5, SE, and SE2 are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Do not earth
(ground) these terminals.
Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (RES, SOF, X1, X2, ROH) and the pulse train output terminal (FM). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the analog output terminal AM. It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RDY, RSO, CVO, Y1, Y2). The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Terminal SE2 is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (Y3). The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Do not connect anything to the free terminal (NC) of the control circuit.
CAUTION
Do not connect anything to the free terminal (NC) of the control circuit.
Using the terminal may cause a damage to the converter and the inverter.
62
HC2.book 63 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
(2) Signal inputs by contactless switches
The contacted input terminals of the converter (RES, SOF, X1, X2, ROH) can be controlled using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown on the right.
+24V
RES, etc
Converter
SD
External signal input using transistor
2.13.4 Wiring instructions
It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm
2
gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm
2
or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
The wiring length should be 30m (200m for the terminal FM) at the maximum.
To minimize EMI, use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and place them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
For the cables connected to the control circuit terminals, connect their shields to the common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal. When connecting external power supply to the terminal PC, however, connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power supply. Do not directly earth (ground) the shield to the enclosure, etc.
Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
Micro signal contacts
Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. RES) of the control circuit.
Always use relay coil, lamp, etc. for fault output terminals (A, B, C).
Wiring of the control circuit of the FR-HC2-75K, FR-HC2-H110K or higher
Separate the wiring of the control circuit away from the wiring of the main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the converter side and lead wires.
<Wiring>
Twin contacts
2
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with a cutter knife and such.
CAUTION
Do not connect anything to the free terminal (NC) of the control circuit.
Using the terminal may cause a damage to the converter and the inverter.
Always connect the terminal RDY of the converter to the terminal MRS or the inverter terminal of which X10 signal is assigned to. Also, always connect the terminal SE of the converter to the terminal SD of the inverter. If these are not connected, the converter may be damaged.
63
HC2.book 64 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Wiring of control circuit
2.13.5 When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a connection cable
Having an operation panel on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, you can mount the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) or parameter unit (FR-PU07) to the enclosure surface, and connect it to the converter.
Use the option FR-CB2 , or the following connector and cable available on the market.
(The operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) requires the operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) (option).)
Securely insert one end of connection cable into the PU connector of the high power factor converter and the other end into the connection connector of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) along the guides until the stoppers are fixed.
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2 )(option)
Parameter unit
(FR-PU07) (option)
Operation panel
(FR-DU07-CNV)
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP)(option)
REMARKS
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side. Keep the total cable length within 20m.
Product available on the market (as of Feb. 2012)
Name
1) Communication cable
2) RJ-45 connector
Model Name
SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m)
24AWG 4P
5-554720-3
Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
Tyco Electronics
2.13.6 Communication operation (computer link operation)
Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer, etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can monitor the converter or read and write to parameters.
For further details, refer to
NOTE
RS-485 terminal block and USB connector on the control circuit board cannot be used. Do not connect anything to these.
64
HC2.book 65 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3 PARAMETERS
This chapter provides the "PARAMETERS" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) ................................................. 66
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack
(FR-PU07BB(-L))............................................................................ 69
Parameter list ................................................................................ 73
Description of parameters ........................................................... 75
Parameter clear / All parameter clear.......................................... 120
Parameter copy and parameter verification ............................... 121
65
6
4
5
1
2
3
HC2.book 66 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
3.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
3.1.1
Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
Operation mode indicator
P.CPY: Flickers at the completion of parameter copy.
OFF at converter reset.
PWR : Lit at power ON
Unit indicator
· Hz: Lit to indicate frequency.
· A: Lit to indicate current.
· V: Lit to indicate voltage.
Power / regenerative drive indicator
DRIVE: Lit during power driving
REGEN: Lit during regenerative driving
(DRIVE or REGEN flickers when a stop is made by turning SOF signal ON. (When
Pr. 8 is set to "0 (initial setting)" .)
Monitor indication
Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows the input current, parameter number, etc.
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter dial)
Used to change the frequency setting and parameter values.
Mode switchover
Used to change each setting
Stop operation
Used to stop the converter.
Fault can be reset when protective function is activated
(fault).
Used to set each setting.
If pressed during operation, monitor changes as below;
Input current
Input voltage
Bus voltage
PU stop cancel
Cancels the (PS) display when the converter is stopped by the
(PU stop).
REMARKS
FR-DU07-CNV cannot be used with the inverter. If FR-DU07-CNV is connected to an inverter, "Err." flickers.
66
HC2.book 67 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.1.2
Basic operation (factory setting)
Monitor mode (Input current monitor)
Input voltage monitor
Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
Bus voltage monitor
Parameter setting mode
Parameter clear
Value change
All parameter clear
Display the present setting
(Example)
Parameter and a setting value flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!
Faults clear
Parameter copy
[Operation for displaying faults history]
(Refer to page
Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists, is displayed.
When a fault is displayed, the display shifts as follows by pressing : Input current at the
fault Input voltageat at the fault Bus voltage at the fault Energization time at the fault.
(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)
Pressing the setting dial shows the fault history number.
3
67
HC2.book 68 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
3.1.3
Changing the parameter setting value
Changing example Change the Pr. 3 ROH terminal function selection setting.
Operation
1.
Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2.
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.
Turn until (
Pr. 3
) appears.
4.
Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
Display
The parameter number read previously appears.
5.
Turn to change it to the set
value " ".
6.
Press to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning , you can read another parameter.
· Press to show the setting again.
· Press twice to show the next parameter.
· Press twice to return the monitor to input current monitor.
is displayed... Why?
appears ............. Write disable error appears.............. Write error during operation
For details, refer to
.
REMARKS
The number of digits displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed and set. If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals can not be displayed nor set.
68
HC2.book 69 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))
3.2 Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))
Parameter setting and monitor display can be performed by connecting the parameter unit (FR-PU07) or the parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L) ) to the converter. Note that their functions are limited compared to when they are used with the inverter. PU represents both a parameter unit and an operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) in some sections of this manual.
Batteries are not included in FR-PU07BB-L.
3.2.1
Parts identification of the parameter unit
POWER lamp
Lit when the power turns ON.
POWER lamp
Lit when the power turns ON.
Battery exhaustion warning lamp
When a battery is low, the lamp color changes from green to orange.
I In
10.0
A
STF FWD PU
Monitor
Liquid crystal display
(16 characters 4 lines with
backlight)
Interactive parameter setting
Help function
Trouble shooting guidance
Monitor (current, power, etc.)
ALARM lamp
Lit to indicate an inverter alarm occurrence.
Operation keys
I In
10.0
A
STF FWD PU
Monitor
Liquid crystal display
(16 characters 4 lines with backlight)
Interactive parameter setting
Help function
Trouble shooting guidance
Monitor (current, power, etc.)
ALARM lamp
Lit to indicate an inverter fault occurrence.
FR-PU07 FR-PU07BB
Operation keys
3.2.2
Explanation of keys
Key
to
Description
Used to select the parameter setting mode.
Press to select the parameter setting mode.
Used to display the first priority screen.
Used to display the input frequency when making an initial setting.
Operation cancel key.
Used to display the function menu.
A variety of functions can be used on the function menu.
Used to shift to the next item in the setting or monitoring mode.
Used to enter a parameter number or set value.
Cancels the (PS) display when the converter is stopped by the (PU stop).
/
Does not function
Press either of these keys on the parameter setting mode screen to change the parameter setting value sequentially.
On the selecting screen, these keys are used to move the cursor.
Hold down and press either of these keys to advance or return the display screen one page.
Does not function
Does not function
Stop command key.
Used to reset the converter when a fault occurs.
Used to write a set value in the setting mode.
Used as a clear key in the all parameter clear or fault history clear mode.
Used as a decimal point when entering numerical value.
Used as a parameter number read key in the setting mode.
Used as an item select key on the menu screen such as parameter list or monitoring list.
Used as an fault definition display key in the fault history display mode.
Used as a command voltage read key in the calibration mode.
NOTE
Do not use a sharp-pointed tool to push the keys.
Do not press your fingers against the liquid crystal display.
3
69
HC2.book 70 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))
3.2.3
Monitoring function
(1) Monitor display overview
70
(a) Main monitor
I In
10.0
OL
A
STF FWD EXT
(f) Warning indication
(e) Unit indication
(b) Connection phase sequence indication (d) Operation mode indication
(c) Operating status indication a) Main monitor
Shows the input frequency, input current, bus voltage, fault history and other monitor data.
Press to display the monitoring list.
Select an item from the monitoring list and press
The following items can be monitored.
to monitor the selected item.
I In.................: Input current[A]
V In ...............: Input voltage[V]
Dc Bus ..........: Bus voltage [V]
Alarm His ......: Fault history (The latest 8 faults are displayed)
Hz In .............: Power supply frequency[Hz]
THT %...........: Electronic thermal relay load factor[%]
Pwr In............: Input power [kW]
Cum Pwr .......: Cumulative power [kW]
Cum Opr .......: Cumulative energization time[hr]
I/P Signal ......: Input signal
O/P Signal.....: Output signal
REMARKS
After the first and second priority monitors are changed by the Pr. 52 setting or the terminals X1 and X2, the changed first and second monitors are displayed in the monitoring list at the reading of the monitoring list. If priority monitor is changed while the monitoring list is being read, the change of the priority monitor is not applied.
b) Connection phase sequence indication
The following indicates the connection phase sequence.
STF .......: Positive phase
STR.......: Negative phase
--- ..........: Power supply not detected c) Operation status indication
The following indicates the operation status of the converter.
STOP ....: During the converter stop
FWD......: During power drive
REV ......: During regenerative drive
ALAR ....: At fault occurrence d) Operation mode indication
EXT is always indicated. e) Unit indication
The unit of the main monitor is indicated.
f) Warning indication
The following is indicated when the converter outputs a warning.
Nothing is indicated when there is no warning.
For the details, refer to page
.
OL .........: Overload signal detection
TH .........: Electronic thermal relay pre-alarm
PS .........: PU stop
MT.........: Maintenance signal output
SL .........: Power supply not detected
CP.........: Parameter copy
HC2.book 71 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))
3.2.4
Function menu
Press in any operation mode to call the function menu, on which you can perform various functions.
REMARKS
Some menus are not available.
(1) Function menu list
Function menu
1. MONITOR
2. PU Oper
3. Pr. List
4. Pr. Clear
5. Alarm Hist
6. AlarmClear
7. Inv.Reset
8. T/Shooting
9. S/W
10. Selectop
11. Option
12. FRCpy set
Description
The monitor list appears, and you can change from one monitor to another and set the first priority monitor.
This menu is displayed but its function is disabled.
The parameter menu appears, and you can perform "parameter setting" and "parameter change list display".
The parameter clear menu appears, and you can perform "parameter clear" and "all clear".
This function displays history of past eight faults (alarms).
This function clears all the fault (alarm) history.
This function resets the converter. (Also resets the inverter at the same time.)
This menu is displayed but its function is disabled.
This function displays the firmware control number of the converter.
This menu is displayed but its function is disabled.
This function displays the option fitting states of the option connectors 1 and 2.
The function can perform the "parameter copy" (read, write, verification).
(2) Function menu transition
1 MONITOR
2 PU Oper
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 Dc Bus
4 Alarm His
5 Hz In
6 THT %
7 Pwr In
8 Cum Pwr
9 Cum Opr
10
11
12
13
14
15 I/P Signal
16 O/P Signal
Does not function.
Input current [A]
Input voltage [V]
Bus voltage [V]
Fault description ∗ The latest 8 faults are displayed
Power supply frequency[Hz]
∗1
Electronic thermal relay load factor [%]
Input power [kW]
Cumulative power [kW]
Cumulative energization time [hr]
Nothing is displayed.
Input signal monitor
The displayed names correspond with the terminals as shown below.
STF
STR
AU
RT
RL
RM
RH
JOG
MRS
STOP
RES
CS
RL
RM
RH
MRS
RES
Terminal X1
Terminal X2
Terminal ROH
Terminal SOF
Terminal RES
The displayed names other than above do not have any functions
Nothing is displayed.
Nothing is displayed.
Nothing is displayed.
Nothing is displayed.
Input signal ∗1
Output signal ∗2
∗2 Output signal monitor
The displayed names correspond with the terminals as shown below.
RUN
SU
IPF
FU
ABC1
ABC2
RUN
SU
IPF
Terminal RDY
Terminal RSO
Terminal CVO
OL
OL
FU
Terminal Y1
Terminal Y2
ABC1
ABC2
Terminal Y3
Terminal ABC
3
71
HC2.book 72 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))
1
2
3 Pr.List
4 Pr.Clear
5 Alarm His
6 AlarmClear
7 INV.Reset
8 T/Shooting
9 S/W
10 Selectop
11 Option
12 PRCpy set
3 Pr.List
4 Pr.Clear
5 Alarm His
6 AlarmClear
7 INV.Reset
1 Setting Mode
2 Pr.List
3 Set Pr.List
4 Def.Pr.List
SETTING MODE
0~9:Ser Pr.No.
Select Oper
0 Pr Mode
1 Max.F
2 Min.F
3 ROH Sel
SET Pr.LIST
36 Fan Oper 0
65 Retry No. 3
75 RES Mode 17
Does not function.
1 Clear Pr.
2 Clear All
Clear Pr.
Exec<WRITE>
Cancel<ESC>
Clear All Pr.
Exec<WRITE>
Cancel<ESC>
1 OHT 5 OV2
2 PUE 6 UVT
3 OV2 7 UVT
4 OV2 8 UVT
ALARM CLEAR
Exec<WRITE>
Cancel<ESC>
* The latest 8 faults are displayed.
ALARM CLEAR
Completed
INV.RESET
Exec<WRITE>
Cancel<ESC>
Although it is displayed as INV. RESET, it is resetting the converter.
1 Appl.Grp
2 Pr.List
3 User List
4 Param Copy
36 Fan Oper
0
0, 1
Clear Pr.
Completed
Clear All Pr.
Completed
8 T/Shooting
9 S/W
10 Selectop
11 Option
12 PRCpy set
Does not function.
<S/W>
7889*
Terminal name
RL
RM
RH
RT
The setting values for
Pr. 3
to
Pr. 16
are displayed.
ON
∗
The displayed names correspond with the terminals as shown below.
: 0
: 1
: 2
: 3
<option>
OP1: ----
OP2: HC2
OP3: ----
OFF
RL
RM
RH
MRS
RES
Terminal X1
Terminal X2
Terminal ROH
Terminal SOF
Terminal RES
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
ABC1
ABC2
Terminal RDY
Terminal RSO
Terminal CVO
Terminal Y1
Terminal Y2
Terminal Y3
Terminal ABC
" - - - " means that no corresponding terminal function is assigned (
Pr. 3 to
Pr. 16
= "9999") or the displayed monitor does not have a function.
1 Copy area 1
2 Copy area 2
3 Copy area 3
Name: 0 00
:Select Char
READ:Decide Char
WRITE:DecideName
000
Overwrite area 1
WRITE:Executing
ESC:Cancel
Copy area 1
1 Read VFD
2 Write VFD
3 Verifing 000
Area 1 to VFD
WRITE:Executing
ESC:Cancel
Param Copy
Writing
Completed
Please Reset
Param Copy
Completed
000
Verify Area 1
WRITE:Executing
ESC:Cancel
Param Copy
Completed
72
HC2.book 73 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter list
3.3 Parameter list
REMARKS
indicates simple mode parameters.
The parameters shaded in
Parameter write selection .
allow their settings to be changed during operation even if "1" (write disabled) is set to Pr. 77
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Parameter
44
45
46
47
48
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
16
22
23
24
10
11
8
9
12
13
14
15
6
7
4
5
0
1
2
3
Name Range
Simple mode selection
Maximum power supply frequency
Minimum power supply frequency
ROH terminal function selection
SOF terminal function selection
X1 terminal function selection
X2 terminal function selection
RES terminal function selection
SOF input selection
OH input selection
RDY signal logic selection
RSO terminal function selection
CVO terminal function selection
Y1 terminal function selection
Y2 terminal function selection
Y3 terminal function selection
0, 9999
60Hz (Read only)
50Hz (Read only)
0 to 5, 9999
0, 1, 2
0, 1
0, 100
0 to 16, 98, 99, 100 to 116, 198,
199, 9999
ABC terminal function selection
Current limit level
Current limit level (regenerative)
OL signal output timer
Input current detection level
Input current detection signal delay time
0 to 220%
0 to 220%, 9999
0 to 25s, 9999
0 to 220%
0 to 10s
Input current detection signal retention time 0 to 10s, 9999
Input current detection operation selection 0, 1
Zero current detection level 0 to 220%
Zero current detection time
Life alarm status display
Inrush current limit circuit life display
Control circuit capacitor life display
0 to 1s
0 to 15 (Read only)
0 to 100% (Read only)
0 to 100% (Read only)
Maintenance timer
Maintenance timer alarm output set time
Cooling fan operation selection
Instantaneous power failure detection signal clear
AM output filter
Watt-hour meter clear
Energization time carrying-over times
0 (1 to 9998)
0 to 9998, 9999
0, 1
0, 9999
0 to 5s
0, 10, 9999
Read only
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
Power supply frequency monitoring reference
AM terminal function selection
0 to 4, 9999
45Hz to 65Hz
1 to 3, 5, 6, 7, 21, 1111 to 4444
Input power monitoring reference
DU/PU main display data selection
Input voltage monitoring reference
0 to 100kW/0 to 3600kW
0, 5 to 10, 25, 1111 to 4444
0 to 500V
FM terminal function selection
Bus voltage monitoring reference
1 to 3, 5, 6, 7, 21, 1111 to 4444
0 to 1000V
0.01Hz
1
0.01kW/
1
0.1V
1
0.1V
Increments
1
0.01s
1
1
1
1
1%
1%
1
1
1
0.1%
0.1
0.1%
0.1s
0.1s
1
0.1%
0.01s
1
1
1
0.1%
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to page
Customer setting
Initial value
5%
0.5s
0
100%
100%
0
9999
1
99
150%
9999
0
150%
0s
0.1s
0
4
5
2
3
0
0
100
1
2
3
0
1
0
60Hz
50Hz
5
9999
0.01s
9999
0
9999
60Hz
1234
Rated power
1234
220V/
440V
1234
340V/
680V
3
73
HC2.book 74 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter list
Parameter Name Range
56 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500A/0 to 3600A
57 Restart selection
58 Free parameter 1
59
61
Free parameter 2
Key lock operation selection
65 Retry selection
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence
68 Retry waiting time
69 Retry count display erase
0, 9999
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
0, 10
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
0 to 10, 101 to 110
0.1 to 360s
0
75
77
80
81
82
83
117
118
119
120
121
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection
Parameter write selection
Voltage control proportional gain
Voltage control integral gain
Current control proportional gain
Current control integral gain
PU communication station number
PU communication speed
PU communication stop bit length
PU communication parity check
Number of PU communication retries
0 to 3, 14 to 17
1, 2
0 to 1000%
0 to 1000%
0 to 200%
0 to 200%
0 to 31
48, 96, 192, 384
0, 1, 10, 11
123
124
169
269
PU communication waiting time setting
PU communication CR/LF selection
145 PU display language selection
168
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
0, 1, 2
0 to 10, 9999
0 to 150ms, 9999
0, 1, 2
0 to 7
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 0, 1
500
Communication error execution waiting time 0 to 999.8s
501
Communication error occurrence count display
0
502
Stop mode selection at communication error 0, 3
542
Communication station number (CC-Link) 1 to 64
543
Baud rate (CC-Link)
,
CC-Link extended setting
C0(900)
C1(901)
FM terminal calibration
AM terminal calibration
0 to 4
0, 1, 12
989 Parameter copy alarm release
990
991
Pr. CL
PU buzzer control
PU contrast adjustment
Parameter clear
ALLC All parameter clear
10/100
0, 1
0 to 63
0, 1
Er.CL
PCPY
Fault history clear
Parameter copy
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1, 2, 3
1
0.1s
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
Differs according to the voltage class. (200V class/400V class)
Parameters which can be set when the plug-in option (FR-A7NC) is mounted.
The setting is applied after converter reset or at the next power-ON.
"L.ERR" LED on FR-A7NC flickers when a setting is changed. If the converter is reset, the setting is applied and LED turns off.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU07).
0
0s
0
1
58
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
10/100
0.01A/
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1s
1
1
1%
1
1
1
1
1%
1%
1%
1
1
1ms
1
1
Increments
Initial value
Rated current
0
0
1s
0
9999
9999
9999
0
14
2
100%
100%
100%
100%
0
192
1
2
1
9999
1
0
Refer to page
Customer setting
74
HC2.book 75 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4 Description of parameters
3.4.1
Displaying and hiding extended parameters (Pr. 0)
Description of parameters
Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted.
Parameter
Number
0
Name
Simple mode selection
Initial Value
0
Setting Range
9999
0
Description
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
The simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed
When Pr. 0 ="9999", only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) and parameter unit (FR-PU07). (For the simple mode parameters, refer to the parameter list on
).
In the initial setting ( Pr. 0 ="0"), simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.
REMARKS
When a plug-in option is connected to the converter, the option parameters can also be read.
When reading the parameters using the communication option, all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr. 0 setting.
Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment is displayed as simple mode parameter when the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is mounted.
3.4.2
Input frequency to converter (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
The following parameters indicate that the converter is available for the use when the the power supply frequency is between 50Hz and 60Hz.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value Setting Range
1
2
Maximum power supply frequency
Minimum power supply frequency
60Hz
50Hz
60Hz
50Hz
Description
Indicates that the power supply frequency is 60Hz or lower, and the converter is available for the use.
This parameter cannot be written.
Indicates that the power supply frequency is 50Hz or higher, and the converter is available for the use.
This parameter cannot be written.
3
75
HC2.book 76 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.3
Input terminal function selection (Pr. 3 to Pr. 7)
Use the following parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter
Number
3
4
5
6
7
Name
ROH terminal function selection
SOF terminal function selection
X1 terminal function selection
X2 terminal function selection
RES terminal function selection
Initial
Value
5
0
1
2
3
Initial Signal
ROH (ROH inrush resistance overheat detection)
SOF (converter stop)
X1 (monitor switching)
X2 (monitor switching)
RES (converter reset)
Setting
Range
0 to 5, 9999
(1) Input terminal function assignment
Use Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 to set the functions of the input terminals.
Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Setting
0
Signal
Name
SOF Converter stop
1
2
X1
X2
Monitor switching
Monitor switching
Function
Related
Parameters
Turning ON this signal stops the converter.
Operation can be changed using Pr. 8 .
Pr. 8
Monitor item at PU (operation panel and parameter unit) and terminals FM and AM can be switched by a combination of ON/OFF of these signals.
Pr. 50, Pr. 52,
Pr. 54
3
4
5
9999
Refer to page
RES Converter reset
OH
ROH
External thermal relay input
ROH inrush resistance overheat detection
Turning ON this signal resets the converter.
The signal is input from the external thermal relay.
Turning ON the signal stops the converter operation.
(E.OHT)
Operation can be changed using Pr. 9 .
The ROH signal turns OFF and the converter trips
(E.IOH) when overheating from the inrush resistance occurs or the filter capacitor (FR-HCC2) is detected to be swollen .
Filter capacitor alarm detector is only available for 560K.
Pr. 9
No function
REMARKS
The signals other than the ROH signal can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR.
If the ROH signal, which is assigned to several terminals, turns OFF once, the converter remains tripped until the ROH signal turns ON at all the terminals.
NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
76
HC2.book 77 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.4
Operation selection of SOF signal and OH signal (Pr. 8, Pr. 9)
Operation of SOF signal can be changed by the Pr. 8 setting, and OH signal by the Pr. 9 setting.
Parameter
Number
8
9
Name
SOF input selection
OH input selection
Initial
Value
0
0
Setting
Range
0
1
2
0
1
Description
Turning the SOF signal ON stops the converter operation.
(NO contact)
Turning the SOF signal OFF stops the converter operation.
(NC contact)
External signal: NC contact
CC-Link communication: NO contact
Turning the OH signal ON trips the converter. (NO contact)
Turning the OH signal OFF trips the converter. (NC contact)
<SOF signal input status and
Pr. 8
setting for the converter operation >
SOF Signal Input Status
External terminal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Virtual terminal for CC-Link communication
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pr. 8 = 0 (NO contact)
Operation continues
Operation stops
Operation stops
Operation stops
Pr. 8
Converter Operation
= 1 (NC contact)
Operation stops
Operation stops
Operation stops
Operation continues
Pr. 8 = 2
(External terminal: NC contact)
(Virtual terminal at CC-Link communication: NO contact)
Operation stops
Operation stops
Operation continues
Operation stops
The converter does not operate at the Pr. 8 = "1" (NC contact) setting while FR-A7NC is not mounted. Set Pr. 8 = "2" (NC contact for external signals, NO contact for CC-Link communication).
<OH signal input status and
Pr. 9
setting for the converter operation >
OH Signal Input Status
(external terminal)
ON
OFF
Converter Operation
Pr. 9 = 0 Pr. 9 = 1
Trips
Operation continues
Operation continues
Trips
3
77
HC2.book 78 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.5
Output terminal function selection (Pr. 10 to Pr. 16)
Use the following parameters to change the functions of the open collector output terminals and relay output terminal.
Parameter
Number
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Name
RDY signal logic selection
RSO terminal function selection
CVO terminal function selection
Y1 terminal function selection
Y2 terminal function selection
Y3 terminal function selection
Open collector output terminal
ABC terminal function selection
Relay output terminal
Initial
Value
100
3
4
1
2
5
Initial Signal
RDY (Inverter run enable signal)
RSO (converter reset)
CVO (converter running)
OL (overload alarm)
PHS (power supply phase detection)
Y5 (output voltage match)
Setting Range
0, 100
0 to 16, 98, 99,
100 to 116, 198, 199,
9999
99 ALM (fault output)
(1) Output signal list
Functions of the output terminals can be set.
Refer to the following table and set the parameters. (0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative logic)
Setting
Positive
Logic
Negative
Logic
Signal
Name
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
98
99
9999
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
198
199
RDY
Function
Inverter run enable signal
RSO Converter reset
CVO During converter run
OL Overload alarm
PHS
Y5
Y16
LF
ALM
Power supply phase detection
Output voltage match
Instantaneous power failure detection hold
Alarm output
Fault output
No function
Operation
Output when inverter can run.
Output during a converter reset.
Output when the converter is running.
Output when the current limit function is active.
Output when a phase is confirmed after a completion of the power supply phase detection.
Output when the detected bus voltage equals to the commanded bus voltage.
Related
Parameters
Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 24
IPF
Y7
THP
FAN
FIN
RTY
Y12
Y13
Y14
Electronic thermal relay pre-alarm
Fan fault output
Heatsink overheat prealarm
During retry
Input current detection
Zero current detection
Life alarm
Output when the electronic thermal relay cumulative value reaches 85% of the transistor protection thermal activation level. (Electronic thermal relay protection (E.THT) activates when the value reaches 100%.)
Output at the time of a fan fault.
Output when the heatsink temperature reaches about 85% of the heatsink overheat protection providing temperature.
Output during retry processing.
Output when the converter's input current is higher than the Pr. 25 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 26 .
Output when the converter's input current is lower than the
Pr. 29 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 30 .
Output when the control circuit capacitor or the inrush current limit circuit approaches the end of its service life.
Pr. 36
Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69
Pr. 25, Pr. 26
Pr. 29, Pr. 30
Pr. 31 to Pr. 33
Y15
Instantaneous power failure
Regenerative drive recognition
Maintenance timer signal
Output when an instantaneous power failure is detected.
Output at regenerative operation.
Output when Pr. 34 rises to or above the Pr. 35 setting.
Pr. 57
Pr. 34, Pr. 35
This signal is output when the IPF signal turns ON. Output of this signal is held until a reset or Pr. 44 = "0" is set.
This signal is available during the high power factor converter operation.
Output when an alarm (fan failure or communication error warning) occurs.
Output when the converter's protective function activates to stop the output (at fault occurrence).
Pr. 44
Pr. 36, Pr. 121
Refer to page
78
HC2.book 79 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.6
DC voltage control (Pr. 22 to Pr. 24, Pr. 80, Pr. 81)
DC voltage of the converter can be controlled to be as commanded.
Operation should be stable in the initial setting, but adjust the following parameters when voltage fluctuation occurs due to the environment such as a voltage condition.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
Description
22
23
24
80
81
Current limit level
OL signal output timer
Voltage control proportional gain
Voltage control integral gain
150%
Current limit level (regenerative) 9999
0s
100%
100%
0 to 220%
0 to 220%
9999
0 to 25s, 9999
0 to 1000%
0 to 1000%
(1) Adjustment for the DC voltage fluctuation
(Pr. 80, Pr. 81)
Set the current level where the current limit operation starts
(during power driving).
Set the current level where the current limit operation starts
(during regenerative driving).
Same as Pr. 22
Set the OL signal output start time at the activation of current limit operation.
Set the proportional gain for the voltage control.
Increasing the setting value reduces the DC voltage fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
Set the integral gain for the voltage control.
Increasing the setting value shortens the recovery time from the DC voltage fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
Adjust the fluctuation range of the DC voltage by setting Pr. 80 .
Increasing the setting value reduces the DC voltage fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
Adjust the recovery time to the commanded value at a fluctuation of DC voltage by setting Pr. 81 .
Increasing the setting value shortens the recovery time from the DC voltage fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
NOTE
Setting Pr. 80 too large makes the operation unstable.
Setting only Pr. 81 too large makes the operation unstable.
(2) Setting the current limit level
(Pr. 22 to Pr. 24)
This function limits the output current of the converter at a specified value.
Set the current limit level to Pr. 22 . Current limit level at the regenerative operation can be individually set by setting a value other than "9999" to Pr. 23
For Pr. 22 and Pr. 23 , set current limits in ratios against the converter rated current.
OL signal is output when an output current is limited by the current limit level (when the current limit function is active).
For Pr. 24 , set a time from when the command current reaches the current limit level until OL signal is output.
3
Pr. 22
Pr. 24 Pr. 24
Output current
Pr. 24 time
OL signal
ON ON
NOTE
When the output current reaches the current limit level, DC voltage decreases during power driving, and DC voltage increases during regeneration.
79
HC2.book 80 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.7
Input current detection function (Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 25 to Pr. 30)
The input current during converter running can be detected and output to the output terminal.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting Range Description
25
26
27
28
29
30
Input current detection level
Input current detection signal delay time
Input current detection signal retention time
Input current detection operation selection
Zero current detection level
Zero current detection time
150%
0s
0.1s
0
5%
0.5s
0 to 220%
0 to 10s
0 to 10s
9999
0
1
0 to 220%
0 to 1s
Set the input current detection level.
100% is the rated converter current.
Set the input current detection period. Set the time from when the input current has risen above the setting until the input current detection signal
(Y12) is output.
Set the retention time when Y12 signal is ON.
Y12 signal ON status is retained. The signal is turned OFF at the next start.
Operation continues when Y12 signal is ON.
Converter trips when Y12 signal is ON. (E.CDO)
Set the zero current detection level.
The rated converter current is regarded as 100%.
Set the period from when the input current drops below the Pr. 29 value until the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
Pr. 27 9999, Pr. 28 = 0
Input current
Pr. 25
Input current detection signal
(Y12)
OFF
Pr. 26
Pr. 27
Minimum 0.1s
(initial value)
ON
Time
OFF
(1) Input current detection
(Y12 signal,
Pr. 25 to Pr. 28
)
If the input current remains higher than the Pr. 25 setting during the converter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 26 , the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the converter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When Y12 signal turns ON, the ON state is held for the time set in Pr.
27 .
When Pr. 27 = "9999", the ON state is held until the next start.
When Pr. 28 = "1", turning Y12 signal ON stops the output of the converter and displays the input current detection alarm (E.CDO).
When the trip occurs, Y12 signal stays ON for the time set in Pr. 27 with Pr. 27 9999 setting, and Y12 signal stays ON until a reset with
Pr. 27 = 9999 setting. E.CDO does not occur by setting Pr. 28 = "1" while Y12 is ON. Pr. 28 setting becomes valid after Y12 signal turns
OFF.
Set "12 (positive logic)" or "112 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr.
16 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function of Y12 signal to the output terminal.
p current
Pr. 29
0[A]
Pr. 29
0.1s ∗ Time
(2) Zero current detection
(Y13 signal,
Pr. 29, Pr. 30
)
Start signal
OFF ON
Zero current detection time
(Y13)
OFF ON
Pr. 30
Detection time
OFF ON
Pr. 30
Detection time
If the input current remains lower than the Pr. 29 setting during the converter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 30, the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output from the converter's open collector or relay output terminal.
Set "13 (positive logic)" or "113 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr.
16 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function of Y13 signal to the output terminal.
∗
Once turned ON, the zero current detection time signal (Y13) is held on for at least 0.1s.
NOTE
The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1s. Note that the response time varies with the load.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
CAUTION
A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent hazardous condition to the machine and equipment when using the zero current detection signal.
80
HC2.book 81 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.8
Displaying the life of the converter parts (Pr. 31 to Pr. 33)
Degrees of deterioration of control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit can be diagnosed by the monitor.
When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life is calculated theoretically.)
Parameter
Number
Name
31
32
33
Life alarm status display
Inrush current limit circuit life display
Control circuit capacitor life display
Initial Value
0
100%
100%
Setting
Range
Description
(0 to 15)
(0 to 100%)
(0 to 100%)
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not. Reading only
Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit. Reading only
Displays the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor. Reading only
(1) Life alarm display and signal output (Y14 signal,
Pr. 31
)
Whether any of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not can be checked by Pr. 31 Life alarm status display and life alarm signal (Y14).
bit 15 7 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
Pr. 31
read
Pr. 31
setting read bit2 Cooling fan life bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Bit image is displayed in decimal
Pr. 255
(decimal)
13
12
9
8
5
4
1
0 bit
(binary)
Inrush Current
Limit Circuit Life
Cooling
Fan Life
1101
1100
1001
1000
0101
0100
0001
0000
:With warnings, : Without warnings
Control Circuit
Capacitor Life
The life alarm signal (Y14) turns ON when any of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
For the terminal used for the Y14 signal, set "14 (positive logic)" or "114 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) .
3
NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
81
HC2.book 82 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
(2) Life display of the inrush current limit circuit
(Pr. 32)
The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr. 32 .
The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 time) every
1%/1,000 times.
As soon as 10% (90,000 times) is reached, Pr. 31 bit 3 is turned ON, and also an alarm is output to Y14 signal.
(3) Control circuit capacitor life display
(Pr. 33)
The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 33 as a life.
In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature, and is counted down from 100%.
As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10%, Pr. 31 bit 0 is turned ON, and also an alarm is output to Y14 signal.
(4) Cooling fan life display
The cooling fan speed of 50% or less is detected and "FN" is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) and parameter unit (FR-PU07). As an alarm display, Pr. 31 bit 2 is turned ON, and also an alarm is output to the Y14 signal.
REMARKS
When the converter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50% or less.
NOTE
For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
3.4.9
Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 34, Pr. 35)
When the cumulative energization time of the converter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer output signal (Y15) is output.
(MT) is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV).
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
Parameter
Number
34
35
Name
Maintenance timer
Maintenance timer alarm output set time
Initial Value Setting Range
0
9999
0(1 to 9998)
0 to 9998
9999
Description
Displays the cumulative energization time of the converter in 100h increments.
Reading only
Writing the setting of "0" clears the cumulative energization time.
Set the time taken until when the maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y15) is output.
No function
First power
9998
(999800h)
Maintenance timer
(Pr. 34)
Pr. 35
ON
Set "0" in
Pr. 34
Time
Y15 signal
MT display
OFF ON ON
The cumulative energization time of the converter is stored into the EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 34
Maintenance timer in 100h increments. Pr. 34 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).
The maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y15) is output when the time set in Pr. 34 has reached the time set in Pr. 35
Maintenance timer alarm output set time (100h increments).
For the terminal used for Y15 signal, set "15 (positive logic)" or "115 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) .
NOTE
The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. The energization time of less than 1h is not counted.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
82
HC2.book 83 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.10 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 36)
Cooling fans built into the converter can be controlled.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
36 Cooling fan operation selection 1
0
1
Description
A cooling fan operates at power ON.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is always ON at power ON)
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid.
The fan is always ON while the converter is running.
During a stop, the converter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to the temperature.
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, and [FN] is displayed on the operation panel, and the fan fault (FAN) and alarm (LF) signals are output.
Pr. 36 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power ON.
Pr. 36 = "1"
When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the converter is running
For the terminal used for the FAN signal output, set "9 (positive logic)" or "109 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16
(output terminal function selection) , and for LF signal, set "98 (positive logic)" or "198 (negative logic)".
NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
3.4.11 Instantaneous power failure detection hold (Pr. 44)
Use this function to check the history of instantaneous power failures.
Parameter
Number
44
Name
Instantaneous power failure detection signal clear
Initial
Value
9999
Setting
Range
0
9999
Description
Turns OFF the instantaneous power failure detection hold signal (Y16).
Does not turn OFF the instantaneous power failure detection hold signal (Y16)
Instantaneous power failure detection hold signal (Y16) turns ON when the instantaneous power failure signal (IPF) turns
ON during the high power factor converter operation. The Y16 signal is turned OFF by a reset or by setting Pr. 44 = "0".
For the terminal used for the Y16 signal, set "16 (positive logic)" or "116 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 ( output terminal function selection ).
3
IPF signal
Y16 signal
OFF
OFF
ON OFF
ON
ON OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Write
Pr. 44
="0"
NOTE
Pr. 44 is always read as "9999". The Y16 signal does not turn OFF even if Pr. 44 = "9999".
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (Output terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
83
HC2.book 84 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.12 Reference of the terminal FM (pulse train output) and terminal AM (analog output)
(Pr. 45, Pr. 49, Pr. 51, Pr. 53, Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Two types of monitor output, pulse train output from the terminal FM and analog voltage output from the terminal AM, are available.
Set the reference of the signal output from the terminals FM and AM.
Parameter
Number
45
49
Name
AM output filter
Power supply frequency monitoring reference
51
Input power monitoring reference
Initial value Setting range
0.01s
60Hz
Rated converter power
Description
0 to 5s
45Hz to 65Hz
55K or lower
75K or higher
Set the output filter of terminal AM.
Set the full-scale value when outputting the power supply frequency monitor value from terminal FM or AM.
0 to
100kW Set the full-scale value when outputting the input power
0 to
3600kW monitor value from terminal FM or AM.
53
55
Input voltage monitoring reference
Bus voltage monitoring reference
200V class
400V class
200V class
400V class
220V
440V
340V
680V
0 to 500V
0 to 1000V
56
Current monitoring reference
Rated converter current
55K or lower
75K or higher
0 to
500A
0 to
3600A
(1) Reference for power supply frequency monitor
(Pr. 49)
Set the full-scale value when outputting the input voltage monitor value from terminal FM or AM.
Set the full-scale value when outputting the bus voltage monitor value from terminal FM or AM.
Set the full-scale value when outputting the input current monitor value from terminal FM or AM.
For the calibration of terminal FM, set the full-scale value of the connected meter when the pulse speed of the terminal FM is 1440 pulses/s.
Set the frequency to be indicated as the full-scale value on the frequency meter (1mA analog meter) connected between terminal FM and SD.
The pulse speed is proportional to the power supply frequency. (The maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/s.)
For the calibration of terminal AM, set the full-scale value of the connected meter when output voltage of terminal AM is
10VDC.
Set the frequency to be indicated as the full-scale value on the meter (10VDC voltmeter) connected between terminal AM and 5.
Output voltage is proportional to the frequency. (Maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
2400
1440
10VDC
0Hz
0V
0Hz
45Hz 60Hz 65Hz
(initial value)
Setting range of
Pr. 49
45Hz 60Hz 65Hz
(initial value)
Setting range of
Pr. 49
84
HC2.book 85 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(2) Reference for input power monitor
(Pr. 51)
, input voltage monitor
(Pr. 53)
, bus voltage monitor
(Pr. 55)
, and current monitor
(Pr. 56)
.
For the calibration of terminal FM, set the full-scale value of the connected meter when the pulse speed of terminal FM is
1440 pulse/s.
Set the power (kW), voltage (V) and current (A) to be indicated as the full-scale values to the frequency meter (1mA analog meter) connected between terminal FM and SD.
Pulse speed is proportional to each monitor. (Maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulse/s. )
For the calibration of terminal AM, set the full-scale value of the connected meter when output voltage of terminal AM is
10VDC.
Set the power (kW), voltage (V) and current (A) to be indicated as the full scale values on the meter (10VDC voltmeter) connected between terminal AM and 5.
Output voltage is proportional to each monitor. (Maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
2400
1440
10VDC
0
0
0
0
Pr. 51
Initial setting (rated power)
Pr. 53
Initial setting (220V(440V))
Pr. 55 Initial setting (340V(680V))
Pr. 56
Initial setting (rated current)
3600kW
500V
1000V
3600A
0
0
0
0
Pr. 51
Initial setting (rated power)
Pr. 53
Initial setting (220V(440V))
Pr. 55 Initial setting (340V(680V))
Pr. 56
Initial setting (rated current)
3600kW
500V
1000V
3600A
Setting range
(3) Terminal AM response adjustment
(Pr. 45)
Setting range
Using Pr. 45 , the output voltage response of the terminal AM can be adjusted in the range of 0 to 5s.
Increasing the setting stabilizes the terminal AM output more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the response level to 7ms.)
3
85
HC2.book 86 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.13 DU/PU, terminal FM/AM monitor display selection (Pr. 46 to Pr. 48, Pr. 50, Pr. 52, Pr. 54)
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)/parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be selected.
In addition, signals to be output from the terminal FM (pulse train output) and AM (analog voltage output) can be selected.
Parameter
Number
46
47
48
50
52
54
Name
Watt-hour meter clear
Energization time carrying-over times
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
AM terminal function selection
DU/PU main display data selection
FM terminal function selection
Initial value
9999
0
9999
1234
1234
1234
Setting range
0
10
9999
0 to 65535
(Reading only)
0 to 4
9999
Description
Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
Set the maximum value in the range of 0 to
9999kWh for the monitoring from communication
Set the maximum value in the range of 0 to
65535kW for the monitoring from communication.
Displays the numbers of times that the cumulative energization time monitor exceeded
65535h. Reading only
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative power monitor digit.
The monitor value is clamped at the maximum value.
No shift
The monitor value is cleared when it exceeds the maximum value.
Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
1 to 3, 5, 6, 7, 21,
1111 to 4444
0, 5 to 10, 25,
1111 to 4444
Select the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit.
Refer to the following table for monitor description.
1 to 3, 5, 6, 7, 21,
1111 to 4444
Select the monitor output to terminal FM.
(1) Monitor description list
(Pr. 52)
Set the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) and parameter unit (FR-PU07) in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection .
Set the monitor to be output to the terminal FM (pulse train output) in Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection
Set the monitor to be output to the terminal AM (0 to 10VDC analog voltage output) in Pr. 50 AM terminal function selection
Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The signals marked cannot be selected for monitoring)
Types of Monitor
Input current
Increments
0.01A/0.1A
Pr. 52 Setting
DU LED
PU main monitor
0
Pr. 54 (FM)
Pr. 50 (AM)
Setting
1
Full-scale
Value of the
Terminal FM and AM
Pr. 56
Description
Input voltage
Bus voltage
Fault display
Power supply frequency
Electronic thermal relay load factor
0.1V
0.1V
—
0.01Hz
0.1%
0
0
0
5
6
2
3
5
6
Pr. 53
Pr. 55
Pr. 49
100%
Displays the converter input current.
Displays the converter input voltage effective value.
Displays the converter output voltage.
Displays 8 past faults individually.
Displays power supply frequency.
Displays the motor thermal cumulative value by regarding the thermal operation level as 100%.
Input power
0.01kW/
0.1kW
7 7 Pr. 51 Displays the converter input power.
Cumulative power
Cumulative energization time
Input power (with regenerative display)
Reference voltage output
Input terminal status
Output terminal status
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh
1h
0.1kW/1kW
—
—
—
25
8
9
10
21
—
—
—
—
—
—
Displays the cumulative power based on the input power monitor.
Can be cleared by
Displays the cumulative energization time since the converter shipment.
You can check how many times the monitor value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 47 .
Displays the converter input power
The value is displayed with "-" (minus sign) during the regenerative driving.
Terminal FM: 1440 pulse/s is output.
Terminal AM: 10V is output.
Displays the input terminal ON/OFF status on the operation panel
86
HC2.book 87 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Types of Monitor Increments
Pr. 52 Setting
DU LED
PU main monitor
Pr. 54
Pr. 50
(FM)
(AM)
Setting
Full-scale
Value of the
Terminal FM and AM
Description
Switching by input terminal
Depends on the monitor
1111 to 4444
Depends on the monitor
Monitoring item is changed by ON/OFF of input terminal.
The cumulative energization time is accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) by regarding 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from
0.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed
Since the panel display of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) is in four digits, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed as "----".
Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
It is displayed only in FR-DU07-CNV.
REMARKS
By setting "0" to Pr. 52 , the monitoring of output frequency to alarm display can be selected in sequence by .
When the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) is used, the displayed units are Hz, V and A only and the others are not displayed.
The monitor set in Pr. 52 is displayed in the second monitor position. (The input voltage monitor is changed.)
Note that the input terminal status and the output terminal status are displayed in the third monitor (bus voltage) position.
Initial setting
The monitor displayed at powering ON is the first monitor. Display the monitor you want to display on the first monitor and hold down for 1s.
(To return to the input current monitor, display the input current monitor and hold down for 1s.)
•
Power-on monitor (first monitor)
•
Second monitor
•
Third monitor
With fault
•
Fault monitor
Input current monitor Input voltage monitor Bus voltage monitor
Example) When Pr. 52 = "9" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as shown below.
•
Power-on monitor (first monitor)
•
Second monitor
•
Third monitor
With fault
•
Fault monitor
Input current monitor Input voltage monitor Cumulative energization time monitor
(2) Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) I/O terminal monitor
(Pr. 52)
When Pr. 52 = "25", the I/O terminal states can be monitored on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV).
The I/O terminal monitor is displayed on the third monitor.
The LED is ON when the terminal is ON, and the LED is OFF when the terminal is OFF. The center line of LED is always ON.
On the I/O terminal monitor, the upper LEDs indicate the input terminal status, and the lower LEDs indicate the output terminal status.
3
SOF
X1
X2
RES
ROH
Input terminal
- Display example -
When signals X2,
ROH and RDY are ON
Hz
A
MON
P.CPY
PWR
V
REGEN DRIVE
Center line is always ON
RDY
RSO
CVO
Y1
Y2
Y3
ABC
88R
Output terminal
87
HC2.book 88 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(3) Cumulative power monitor and clear
(Pr. 46, Pr. 48)
On the cumulative power monitor ( Pr. 52 = "8"), the input power is accumulated and updated in 100ms increments. (The value is stored in EEPROM every 1h.)
Display increments and display ranges of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV), parameter unit (FR-PU07) and communication (RS-485 communication) are as indicated below.
Operation Panel Parameter Unit Communication
Range Increments Range Increments
Range
Pr. 46 = 10 Pr. 46 = 9999
0 to 99.99kWh
100.0 to 999.9kWh
0.01kWh
0.1kWh
0 to 999.99kWh
1000.0 to 9999.9kWh
0.01kWh
0.1kWh
0 to 9999kWh
0 to 65535kWh
(Initial setting)
1000 to 9999kWh 1kWh 10000 to 99999kWh 1kWh
Power is measured in the range of 0 to 9999.99kWh, and displayed in four digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "99.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
Power is measured in the range of 0 to 99999.99kWh, and displayed in five digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "999.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
Increments
1kWh
The monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 48 .
For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh when Pr. 48 = "2", the PU/DU display is 12.78 (display in
100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 48 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that a digit shift is necessary. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 48 = "9999", the power returns to 0, and the counting starts again.
Writing "0" in Pr. 46 clears the cumulative power monitor.
REMARKS
If "0" is written to Pr. 46 , and Pr. 46 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.
(4) Input power (with regenerative display) (
Pr. 52
= "10")
On the input power monitor (with regenerative display) ( Pr. 52 = "10"), the input power to the converter is displayed with a sign.
On the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV), the input power is displayed as a positive value (no sign) during the power driving and displayed with a minus sign during the regenerative driving.
<DU07-CNV display during the regenerative driving>
<DU07-CNV display during the power driving>
The first 7-segment LED is only used to display the sign.
When the monitored value is 100kW or more, the displayed unit is 1kW. When the power value is 1000kW or more, it is limited at 999kW. When the power value is -1000kW or less, it is limited at -999kW.
Positive value (no sign) is displayed in the input power display on the communication option and FR-PU07 during power driving and regenerative driving.
REMARKS
Input power (with regenerative display) ( Pr. 52 ="10") cannot be assigned to a FM/AM analog output terminal.
(5) Cumulative energization time monitor
(Pr. 47)
On the cumulative energization time monitor ( Pr. 52 = "9"), the energization time has been cumulated every hour since the shipment of the converter.
If the number of monitor value exceeds 65535, it is added up from 0. You can check how many times the cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 47 .
88
HC2.book 89 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(6) Monitor switching with input terminal
(Pr. 50, Pr. 52, Pr. 54)
Monitoring item can be switched by ON/OFF of terminals X1 and X2.
By setting 1 to 4 to the four digits of Pr. 52 (Pr. 54, Pr. 50) , monitor can be switched by the terminals.
Number set in each digits represents the following monitor.
Pr. 50 , Pr. 52 , Pr. 54 Setting
3
4
1
2
Monitoring Item
Input current monitor
Bus voltage monitor
Input voltage monitor
Input power monitor
Status of X1
Status of X2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Pr. 50, Pr. 52, Pr. 54 =
1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit
1st digit
2nd digit
3rd digit
4th digit
In the initial setting (1234), the monitor changes according to the input terminal status as shown below.
X1
X2
Monitoring item
OFF
OFF
1
Input current monitor
ON
OFF
2
Bus voltage monitor
OFF
ON
3
Input voltage monitor
ON
ON
4
Input power monitor
3.4.14 Operation selection at instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57)
When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the converter can restart at the power restoration.
Parameter
Number
57
Name
Restart selection
Initial value
9999
Setting range
0
9999
Description
Restarts at the power restoration after an instantaneous power failure
Does not restart
If restart after instantaneous power failure is activated at the inverter side, set Pr. 57 Restart selection = "0" at the converter side.
When Pr. 57 ="9999," the inverter output is stopped by the fault signal "E.IPF" from the converter even though the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is activated in the inverter.
CAUTION
The motor and machine will start suddenly after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure (after the reset time has elapsed). Stay away from the motor and machine when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected.
If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function has been selected, apply the CAUTION stickers, which are supplied with the Instruction Manual of the inverter, to easily visible places.
3
89
HC2.book 90 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.15 Free parameter (Pr. 58, Pr. 59)
You can input any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:
As a unit number when multiple units are used.
As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Parameter
Number
58
59
Name
Free parameter 1
Free parameter 2
Initial value
9999
9999
REMARKS
Pr. 58 and Pr. 59 do not influence the operation of the converter.
Setting range
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
Description
Desired values can be input. Data is held even if the converter power is turned OFF.
3.4.16 Key lock selection of operation panel(Pr. 61)
Key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Parameter
Number
61
Name
Key lock operation selection
Initial value
0
Setting range
0
10
Description
Key lock invalid
Key lock valid
Setting dial and key operation can be set invalid to avoid unintended changes to parameters.
Set "10" to Pr. 61 , and hold monitor display.
for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid and to change the display to the
When the setting dial and key operation are invalid, appears on the operation panel. If dial or key operation is attempted while dial and key operation is invalid, performed for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press
appears. (When the setting dial or key operation is not for 2s.
REMARKS
Even when the setting dial and key operation are invalid, reset by
Switching of monitor is not available.
NOTE
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
at a converter trip is still valid.
90
HC2.book 91 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.17 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
If a fault occurs, the converter resets itself automatically to restart. Fault-activating retries can be also selected.
Parameter
Number
65
Name
Retry selection
67
68
69
Retry success example
Converter operation
0
Retry start
Fault occurrence
Retry success count
RTY ON
Retry failure example
Converter operation
Number of retries at fault occurrence
Retry waiting time
Retry count display erase
Retry success
Pr. 68
Pr. 68 × 4
(If it is below 6s, 6s is set.)
Pr. 68 Pr. 68 Pr. 68
0
First Second Third
Fault occurrence retry
Fault retry occurrence
Fault occurrence retry
Fault signal
(ALM)
ON ON ON
RTY
Initial value
0
0
1s
0
Time
Success count + 1
Time
Retry failure
(E.RET)
ON
Setting range Description
0 to 4
0
1 to 10
101 to 110
0 to 360s
0
A fault for retry can be selected. (Refer to the table in the next page.)
No retry function
Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence.
A fault output is not provided during the retry operation.
Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence. (The setting value minus 100 is the number of retries.)
A fault output is provided during the retry operation.
Set the waiting time from when a converter fault occurs until a retry is made.
Clear the number of restarts succeeded by retries.
Retry operation automatically resets a fault and restarts the converter when the time set in Pr. 68 elapses after the converter trip.
Retry operation is performed when Pr. 67 "0". Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence to Pr. 67 .
When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr. 67 , a retry count excess fault (E.RET) occurs, resulting in a converter trip. (Refer to the Retry failure example.)
Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the converter trips until a retry is made in the range of 0 to 360s. (When the setting value is "0s", the actual time is 0.1s.)
Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retries.
The cumulative count in Pr. 69 increases by 1 when a retry is successful. Retry is regarded as successful when normal operation continues without a fault for the Pr. 68 setting multiplied by four or longer (6s at the shortest).
(When retry is successful, cumulative number of retry failure is cleared. )
Writing "0" in Pr. 69 clears the cumulative count.
During a retry, RTY signal is ON. For RTY signal, assign the function by setting "11 (positive logic)" or
"111(negative logic)" in any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) .
NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 11 to
Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
3
91
HC2.book 92 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Using Pr. 65 , you can select the fault that will cause a retry. No retry will be made for the fault not indicated. (Refer to page
126 for the fault description. )
indicates the faults selected for retry.
Fault for
Retry
E.OC2
E.OV2
E.THT
E.IPF
E.UVT
E.OHT
E.OP3
E.CDO
E.ILF
E.8
0
1
Pr. 65 Setting
2 3
4
NOTE
The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the fault which occurred the first time.
When an converter fault is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal relay function, etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-ON reset.)
CAUTION
Stay away from the motor and machine when the converter trips while the retry function is selected. Motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after a converter trip.
If the retry function has been selected, apply the CAUTION stickers, which are supplied with the Instruction
Manual of the inverter, to easily visible places.
3.4.18 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-DU07-CNV/FR-PU07) connector detection function and PU stop function.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
Number
75
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
14 0 to 3, 14 to 17
For the initial setting, reset is always enabled, without disconnected PU detection, and with PU stop function are set.
The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is performed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
Pr. 75
Setting
0
Reset Selection
1
2
3
Reset input always enabled
Reset input is enabled only when a fault occurs.
Reset input always enabled
Reset input is enabled only when a fault occurs.
14
(Initial setting)
15
16
17
Reset input always enabled
Reset input is enabled only when a fault occurs.
Reset input always enabled
Reset input is enabled only when a fault occurs.
Disconnected PU detection
If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued.
When the PU is disconnected, the converter trips.
If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued.
When the PU is disconnected, the converter trips.
Stop by
Press
PU Stop Selection
is not available.
to stop.
92
HC2.book 93 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(1) Reset selection
You can select the enable condition of reset function (RES signal, reset command through communication) input.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "1, 3, 15, 17", a reset can be input only when the converter is tripped.
NOTE
Inputting the reset signal (RES) during operation also resets the inverter. The motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output. Also, the cumulative value of the electronic thermal relay is cleared.
The reset key of the parameters is only valid when the converter is tripped, independently of the Pr. 75 setting.
(2) Disconnected PU detection
This function detects that the PU (FR-DU07-CNV/FR-PU07) has been disconnected from the converter for 1s or longer and causes the converter to provide a fault output (E.PUE) and to trip.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15", operation continues if the PU is disconnected.
NOTE
When the PU has been disconnected since before power-ON, it is not judged as a fault.
To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the converter.
When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid.
(3) PU stop selection
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "14 to 17", input from the PU stops the converter.
When the converter is stopped by the PU stop function, " " is displayed. A fault output is not provided.
(4) How to restart the motor stopped by
Converter output
input from the PU (PU stop (PS) reset method)
Time
(a) Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
1)Turn SOF signal ON and stop the converter operation.
2)Press
Key
Operation panel
SOF OFF
Key
ON OFF
3)Turn SOF signal OFF and restart the converter operation.
Stop/restart example for external operation
(b) Parameter unit (FR-PU07)
1)Turn SOF signal ON and stop the converter operation.
2)Press EXT
3
3)Turn SOF signal OFF and restart the converter operation.
The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal.
CAUTION
Do not reset the converter while the inverter start signal is being input.
Otherwise, the motor will start suddenly after resetting, leading to potentially hazardous conditions.
93
HC2.book 94 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.19 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)
You can select whether to enable the writing to various parameters or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Parameter
Number
77
Name
Parameter write selection
Initial Value
2
Setting Range
1
2
Description
Parameter write is disabled.
Parameter write is enabled regardless of operation status.
Pr. 77 can always be set independently from the operation status.
(1) Disable parameter write
(Setting "1")
Parameter write is disabled.
(Read is enabled.)
Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot be performed, either.
Parameter
Number
0
75
77
Name
Simple mode selection
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection
Parameter write selection
The parameters given on the right can be written even when Pr. 77 = "1".
(2) Write parameters during operation
(Setting "2")
Parameter can be always written.
The following parameter cannot be written when the converter is running with Pr. 77 = "2". Stop the converter when changing the parameter setting.
Parameter
Number
10
Name
RDY signal logic selection
94
HC2.book 95 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.20 Current control (Pr. 82, Pr. 83)
This function controls current to be as commanded.
Operation should be stable in the initial setting, but adjust the following parameters when current fluctuation occurs due to the environment such as power source condition.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting Range Description
82
83
Current control proportional gain
Current control integral gain
100%
100%
0 to 200%
0 to 200%
Set the proportional gain for the current control.
Increasing the setting value reduces the current fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
Set the integral gain for the current control.
Increasing the setting value shortens the recovery time from the current fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
Adjust the fluctuation range of current by setting Pr. 80 .
Increasing the setting value reduces the current fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
Adjust the recovery time to the commanded current after a current fluctuation by setting Pr. 83 .
Increasing the setting value shortens the recovery time from the current fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
NOTE
Setting Pr. 82 too large makes the operation unstable.
Setting only Pr. 83 too large makes the operation unstable.
3.4.21 Wiring and configuration of PU connector
Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the converter or read and write to parameters.
(1) PU connector pin-outs
RS-485 terminal block cannot be used.
8) to
1)
Converter
(Receptacle side)
Front view
Pin
Number
1)
7)
8)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Name
SG
RDA
SDB
SDA
RDB
SG
Description
Earth (ground)
(connected to terminal 5)
Operation panel power supply
Converter receive+
Converter send-
Converter send+
Converter receive-
Earth (ground)
(connected to terminal 5)
Operation panel power supply
3
NOTE
Pins No. 2 and No. 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.
The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
95
HC2.book 96 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
(2) Wiring and configuration of PU connector communication system
System configuration
FR-DU07-CNV Operation panel connector
FR-ADP
(option)
RJ-45 connector 2)
Converter
PU connector
RS-485 interface/ terminals
RJ-45 connector 2)
Connection cable 1)
Computer
Station 0 Computer
Converter RS-232C connector
PU connector
RS-232C cable
Maximum
15m
RS-232C-RS-485 converter
RJ-45 connector 2)
Connection cable 1)
Station 0
Converter
PU connector
RJ-45 connector 2)
Connection cable 1)
Wiring of RS-485 computer
Converter
Computer Side Terminals
Signal name
RDA
RDB
SDA
Description
Receive data
Receive data
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
Send data
Send data
Request to send
Request to send
CSB
SG
FG
Clear to send
Clear to send
Signal ground
Frame ground
Cable connection and signal direction
Connection cable
∗
0.2mm
2
or more
PU connector
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
REMARKS
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Product available on the market (as of Feb. 2012)
Product
1) Communication cable
2) RJ-45 connector
Type
SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m)
24AWG 4P
5-554720-3
Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
Tyco Electronics
Do not use pins No. 2 and No. 8 of the communication cable.
96
HC2.book 97 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.22 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)
This function is used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the converter and personal computer.
Use PU connector of the converter for communication.
You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using Mitsubishi inverter protocol.
To make communication between a personal computer and a converter, initialization of the communication specifications must be made to the converter.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error.
[Parameters related to PU connector communication]
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting Range
117
118
119
120
121
123
124
PU communication station number
PU communication speed
PU communication stop bit length
PU communication parity check
Number of PU communication retries
PU communication waiting time setting
PU communication CR/LF selection
Description
0
1
2
1
9999
1
0 to 31
192 48, 96, 192, 384
0
1
10
11
0
1
2
0 to 10
9999
0 to 150ms
9999
0
1
2
Converter station number specification
Set the converter station numbers when two or more converters are connected to one personal computer.
Set the communication speed.
The setting value 100 equals the communication speed.
For example, if 192 is set, the communication speed is
19200bps.
Stop bit length
1bit
8 bits
Data length
2 bits
1bit
7 bits
2 bits
Without parity check
With parity check at odd numbers
With parity check at even numbers
Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception. If it is still unsuccessful after the permissible number of retries, the converter stops retrying communication.
The converter does not retry communication even when the communication is unsuccessful.
Set the waiting time between data transmission to the converter and the response.
Set with communication data.
Without CR/LF
With CR
With CR/LF
NOTE
Always reset the converter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After you change the communicationrelated parameters, communication cannot be made until the converter is reset.
3
97
HC2.book 98 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.23 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. from the PU connector of the converter using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication).
(1) Communication
The communication specifications are given below.
Item
Communication protocol
Conforming standard
Number of connectable devices
Communication speed PU connector
Control procedure
Communication method
Character system
Start bit
Stop bit length
Communication
Parity check
Error check
Terminator
Waiting time setting
Description
Mitsubishi protocol (computer link)
EIA-485(RS-485)
1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations
Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400bps
Asynchronous
Half-duplex
ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected.)
1bit
1 bit or 2 bits can be selected.
Check (with even or odd parity) or no check can be selected.
Sum code check
CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)
Selectable between presence and absence
Related
Parameters
Pr. 117
Pr. 118
Pr. 119
Pr. 119
Pr. 120
Pr. 124
Pr. 123
(2) Communication procedure
Computer
(Data flow)
Converter
Converter
(Data flow)
Computer
∗1
1)
When data is read
∗2
2)
When data is written
3)
4) 5)
Time
Data communication between the computer and converter is made in the following procedure.
1) Request data is sent from the computer to the converter. (The converter will not send data unless requested.)
2) After waiting for the waiting time,
3) The converter sends reply data to the computer in response to the computer request.
4) After waiting for the converter data processing time,
5) An answer from the computer in response to reply data 3) of the converter is transmitted.
(Even if 5) is not sent, subsequent communication is made properly.)
If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, perform retry operation with the user program. The converter stops retrying and outputs the LF signal when the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
On receipt of a data error occurrence, the converter returns reply data 3) to the computer again. The converter stops retrying and outputs the LF signal when the number of consecutive data errors exceeds the number set in the parameter.
98
HC2.book 99 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(3) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
Data communication between the computer and converter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows.
No.
Operation
1)
Communication request is sent to the converter in accordance with the user program in the computer.
2) Converter data processing time
3)
Reply data from the converter
(Data 1) is checked for an error)
No error
(Request accepted)
With error
(Request rejected)
4) Computer processing delay time
5)
Answer from computer in response to reply data 3).
(Data 3) is checked for error)
No error
(No converter processing)
With error
(Converter outputs 3) again.)
Parameter/
Monitor
Write
A
A1
Present
C
D
Absent
Absent
Converter
Reset
A
Absent
C
D
Absent
Absent
Monitor
Present
E
E1
10ms or more
B
D
Absent (C)
F
Parameter
Read
B
Present
E
D
Absent (C)
F
In the communication request data from the computer to the converter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)".
Reply from the converter to the converter reset request can be selected.
Data writing format
Communication request data from the computer to the converter 1)
Format
A
A1
1
ENQ
ENQ
2 3
Station number
Station number
4 5
Number of Characters
6 7 8 9
Instruction code
Instruction code
Data
Data
Sum check
10 11 12 13
Sum check
Reply data from the converter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format
C
Number of Characters
1
ACK
2 3
Station number
4
Reply data from the converter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format
1
Number of Characters
2 3 4 5
D
NAK
Station number
Error code
Indicate a control code
Specify the station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
Waiting time
When Pr. 123 (Waiting time setting) 9999, create a communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the converter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the converter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 (CR/LF selection).
3
99
HC2.book 100 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Data reading format
Communication request data from the computer to the converter 1)
Format
B
1
ENQ
2 3
Number of Characters
4 5 6
Station number
Instruction code
7
Sum check
8
Reply data from the converter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format
E
E1
1
STX
STX
2 3
Station number
Station number
4
Number of Characters
5 6 7
Read data
Read data
ETX
8
Sum check
ETX
Reply data from the converter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format
D
1
NAK
Number of Characters
2 3
Station number
4
Error code
5
9
9
Sum check
10
11
Send data from the computer to the converter 5)
Format
1
Number of Characters
2 3 4
C
(Without
ACK
Station number
data error)
F
(With data
NAK
Station number
error)
Indicate a control code
Specify the station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
Waiting time
When Pr.123 (Waiting time setting) 9999, create a communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the converter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the converter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 (CR/LF selection) .
100
HC2.book 101 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(4) Data definitions
1) Control code
Signal
Name
STX
ETX
ENQ
ACK
LF
CR
NAK
ASCII Code
H02
H03
H05
H06
H0A
H0D
H15
Description
Start Of Text (Start of data)
End Of Text (End of data)
Enquiry (Communication request)
Acknowledge (No data error detected)
Line Feed
Carriage Return
Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2) Station number
Specify the station number of the converter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the converter. Hence, the converter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code appropriately. (Refer to page
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the converter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes.
5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the converter from the computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer in the range of 0 to 150ms in 10ms increments. (Example; 1:10ms, 2:20ms)
Computer
Converter
Converter
Converter data processing time
= Waiting time
(setting 10ms)
+ data check time
(About 10 to 30ms, which depends on the instruction code)
Computer
REMARKS
When Pr. 123 (waiting time setting) 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
The data check time varies by the instruction code.
6) Sum check code
The sum check code is a 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
(Example 1)
Computer Converter
ASCII Code
ENQ Station number
0 1
Instruction code
E 1 1
Data
Sum check code
0 7 A D F 4
H05 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
Binary code
3
H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
= H1F4
Sum
* When the
Pr. 123 Waiting time setting
"9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
(Example 2)
Converter Computer
ASCII Code
STX Station number
Data read
0 1 1 7 7 0
ETX
Sum check code
3 0
H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
Binary code
H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30
= H130
Sum
101
HC2.book 102 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
7) Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the converter, its error definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code.
Error
Code
H0
H1
H2
H3
HA
HB
HC
HD
HE
HF
Error Item Error Description Converter Operation
Computer NAK error
Parity error
Sum check error
Protocol error
The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than permissible number of retries.
The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the converter.
The data received by the converter has a grammatical mistake.
Or, data receive is not completed within the predetermined time.
Framing error
Overrun error
CR or LF is not as set in the parameter.
The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
New data has been sent by the computer before the converter completes receiving the preceding data.
The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control
Character error
Mode error code).
Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode, when the operation command source is not present, or when parameter write is disabled.
Instruction code error The specified instruction code does not exist.
Data range error
Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, etc.
If errors occur consecutively and exceed the number of the permissible number of retries
( Pr. 121 ), the converter outputs the alarm (LF).
Does not accept the received data.
Does not accept the received data.
(5) Response time
Computer
Converter
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Converter
Computer
Converter data processing time
Time
Waiting time
(setting 10ms)
Data check time
(depends on the instruction code (see the following table))
10ms or more necessary
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
[Formula for data transmission time]
1
Communication speed (bps)
Number of data characters
Communication specifications
Communication
(Total number of bits)
(Refer to the following.)
Data check time
Name
Stop bit length
Data length
Parity check
Present
Absent
Number of Bits
1 bit
2 bits
7 bits
8 bits
1 bit
0
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.
Minimum number of total bits.................9 bits
Maximum number of total bits.................12 bits
Various monitors
Item
Parameter read/write,
Parameter clear / all clear
Reset command
= data transmission time (s)
Check Time
< 12ms
< 30ms
< 5s
No answer
102
HC2.book 103 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(6) Retry count setting
(Pr. 121)
Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to
page 102 for data receive error for retry.)
If data receive errors occur consecutively and exceed the permissible number of retries set, the converter outputs the alarm (LF). (The converter does not trip.)
If "9999" is set, the alarm (LF) is output at a data communication error. (The converter does not trip.)
For the terminal used for LF signal output, set "98 (positive logic)" or "198 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) .
Example: PU connector communication,
Pr. 121
= "1" (initial value)
Computer Converter
Converter Computer
Wrong Wrong
Reception error
LF OFF
Example: PU connector communication,
Pr. 121
= "9999"
Reception error
ON
Computer Converter
Converter Computer
LF OFF
Wrong Wrong
Reception error
ON
Reception error
Normal
OFF
3
103
HC2.book 104 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(7) Instructions for the program
1) When data from the computer has any error, the converter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always insert a retry program for data error.
2) All data communication, e.g. run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication request. The converter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
3) Program example
Example of clearing parameters of the converter
Programming example of Microsoft
®
Visual C++
®
(Ver.6.0)
#include <stdio.h>
#include <windows.h>
} void main(void){
HANDLE
DCB
COMMTIMEOUTS hCom; hDcb; // Structure for communication setting hTim; // Structure for time out setting
} char char char int int
BOOL int int szTx[0x10]; szRx[0x10]; nSum; bRet;
// Send buffer
// Receive buffer szCommand[0x10];// Command nTx,nRx; // For buffer size storing
// For sum code calculation nRet; i;
// Opens COM1 port hCom = CreateFile ("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL); if (hCom != NULL) {
// Makes a communication setting of COM1 port
GetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); hDcb.DCBlength = sizeof(DCB); hDcb.BaudRate = 19200; hDcb.ByteSize = 8; hDcb.Parity = 2;
// Retrieves current communication information
// Structure size setting
// Communication speed=19200bps
// Data length=8 bits
// Even parity hDcb.StopBits = 2; bRet = SetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); if (bRet == TRUE) {
// Makes a time out setting of COM1 port
// Stop bit=2 bits
// Sets the changed communication data
Get CommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim); hTim.WriteTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000;
// Obtains the current time out value
// Write time out 1s hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000;
SetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);
// Read time out 1s
// Changed time out value setting
// Sets a command to clear parameters of the station 1 converter. sprintf(szCommand,"01FC15A5A"); nTx = strlen(szCommand);
// Generates sum code
// Send data (Parameter clear)
//Send data size
// Initialization of sum data
} nSum = 0; for (i = 0;i < nTx;i++) { nSum += szCommand[i]; nSum &= (0xff);
// Calculates sum code
// Masks data
// Generates send data memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx)); memset(szRx,0,sizeof(szRx));
// Initialization of send buffer
// Initialization of receive buffer sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum);// ENQ code+send data+sum code nTx = 1 + nTx + 2; // Number of ENQ code+number of send data+number of sum code nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL);
// Sending if(nRet != 0) { nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL);
// Receiving if(nRet != 0) {
// Displays the receive data for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) { printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Consol output of receive data
// Displays ASCII coder in hexadecimal. Displays 30 when "0"
} printf("\n\r");
}
}
}
CloseHandle(hCom); // Close communication port
104
HC2.book 105 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
General flowchart
Port open
Communication setting
Time out setting
Send data processing
Data setting
Sum code calculation
Data transmission
Receive data waiting
Receive data processing
Data retrieval
Screen display
CAUTION
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal loss etc., the converter (inverter) cannot be stopped. Turn the RES signal ON or shut off the power supply to coast the motor to a stop and to stop the converter
(inverter) operation.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the converter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
3
105
HC2.book 106 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(8) Setting items and set data
After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data, then start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
Item
Input current
Input voltage
Bus voltage
Special monitor
Special monitor selection No.
Read/
Write
Instruction
code
Read
Read
Read
Read
Read
Write
H6F
H70
H71
H72
H73
HF3
Data Description
H0000 to HFFFF: Input current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A increments
(55K or lower) / 0.1A increments (75K or higher)
H0000 to HFFFF: Input voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Bus voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3
H01to H10: Monitor selection data
Refer to the special monitor No. table
Number of
Data Digits
(Format)
4 digits
(B.E/D)
4 digits
(B.E/D)
4 digits
(B.E/D)
4 digits
(B.E/D)
2 digits
(B.E1/D)
2 digits
(A1,C/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two latest fault records b15 b8b7
H74 Second fault in past Latest fault b0
Fault record Read H74 to H77
H75 Fourth fault in past Third fault in past
4 digits
(B.E/D)
H76 Sixth fault in past Fifth fault in past
H77 Eighth fault in past Seventh fault in past
Refer to the fault data table
Converter status monitor
(expansion)
Converter status monitor
Read
Read
H79
H7A
The states of the output signals during power driving, regenerative driving, etc. can be monitored. (Refer to
for the details.)
Converter reset Write HFD
H9696: resets the converter.
As the converter is reset at the start of communication by the computer, the converter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
H9966: resets the converter.
When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to the computer, and then the converter is reset.
Faults history batch clear
Write HF4 H9696: clears the faults history as a batch.
Refer to
page 99 for data format (A, A1, B, B1, C, D, E, E1, F).
4 digits
(B.E/D)
2 digits
(B.E1/D)
4 digits
(A,C/D)
4 digits
(A,D)
4 digits
(A,C/D)
106
HC2.book 107 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Item
Read/
Write
Instruction
code
Data Description
Number of
Data Digits
(Format)
Parameter clear
All clear
Parameter
Write
Read
HFC
H00 to H5B
Write H80 to HDB
All parameters return to the initial settings.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data. ( : Clear, : Not clear)
Refer to
page 188 for parameter clear, all clear, and communication
parameters.
Clear Type
Parameter clear
All parameter clear
Data
H9696
H5A5A
H9966
H55AA
Communication Pr.
When clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming operation, set the parameters again. Performing clear will clear the instruction code HF3, and HFF settings.
Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or
H55AA also clears the communication parameter settings back to the initial settings.
Refer to the instruction code
) and write and/or read parameter values as required.
When setting Pr. 100 and later, link parameter extended setting must be set.
Link parameter extended setting
Read
Write
H7F
HFF
Parameter description is changed according to the H00 to H09 setting.
For details of the settings, refer to the instruction code
).
Refer to page 99 for data format (A, A1, B, B1, C, D, E, E1, F).
4 digits
(A,C/D)
4 digits
(B.E/D)
4 digits
(A,C/D)
2 digits
(B.E1/D)
2 digits
(A1,C/D)
REMARKS
Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
For the instruction codes HFF and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an converter reset or all clear is performed.
3
107
HC2.book 108 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
[Special monitor selection No.]
Refer to
page 86 for details of the monitor description.
Data Description
H01 Input current
H02 Input voltage
H03 Bus voltage
H05 Power supply frequency
H06
Electronic thermal relay load factor
Increments
0.01A/0.1A
0.1V
0.1V
0.01Hz
0.1%
Data Description
H07 Input power
H08 Cumulative power
H09
Cumulative energization time
Increments
0.01kW/
0.1kW
1kWh
1h
Data Description
H0A Input power
Increments
0.1kW/
Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
The regenerative status cannot be displayed. The regenerative status display is available only on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV).
Input terminal monitor details (when the terminal is ON: 1, when the terminal is OFF: 0, : undetermined value) b15
RES SOF ROH X2 X1
Output terminal monitor details (when the terminal is ON: 1, when the terminal is OFF: 0, : undetermined value) b15
88R ABC Y3 Y2 Y1
b0
b0
CVO RSO RDY
[Fault data]
Refer to
page 126 for details of fault description.
H11
H21
H30
H40
H50
H51
H52
H90
HA3
Data Description
H00
No fault present
E.OC2
E.OV2
E.THT
E.FIN
E.IPF
E.UVT
E.ILF
E.OHT
E.OP3
Data Description
HB0
HB1
HB2
HB3
HC0
HC1
HC2
HC4
HC5
HF2
HF3
E.PE
E.PUE
E.RET
E.PE2
E.CPU
E.CTE
E.P24
E.CDO
E.IOH
E.2
E.3
Data Description
HF6
HF7
HF8
HF9
HFD
E.6
E.7
E.8
E.9
E.13
Fault record display example (instruction code H74)
For read data H30B1
(Previous fault ...... THT)
(Latest fault ...... OPT) b15 b8b7 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Previous fault
(H30)
Latest fault
(HB1)
[Converter status monitor]
Item
Instruction
Code
Bit
Length
Description Example
Converter status monitor
H7A 8 bits b0 : RDY(Inverter run permission)
b1 : Power driving b2 : Regenerative driving b3 : RSO (converter reset)
b4 : Y1 (overload)
b5 : Y2 (power supply phase detecting) b6 : CVO (converter running)
b7 : 88R (input contactor control)
[Example 1] HO2: Power driving b7
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 b0
0
[Example 2] H40: Converter running b7
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 b0
0
Converter status monitor
(expansion)
H79 16 bits b0 : RDY (Inverter run permission)
b1 : Power driving b2 : Regenerative driving b3 : RSO (converter reset) b4 : Y1 (overload) b5 : Y2 (power supply phase detecting)
b6 : CVO (converter running) b7 : 88R (input contactor control) b8 : ABC (fault)
b9 : b10 : b11 : b12 : b13 : b14 : b15 : Fault occurrence
[Example 1] HO2: Power driving b15
0
H8100: Trip by a fault b15
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
The signal within parentheses is in the initial status. Definitions change according to the Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection).
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 b0
0 b0
0
108
HC2.book 109 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.24 Initial setting and specification for the CC-Link communication function (Pr. 542 to
Pr. 544)
Set the station number and baud rate required for the CC-Link communication.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial value
Setting range
542
543
544
Communication station number (CC-Link)
Baud rate (CC-Link)
CC-Link extended setting
1
0
0
1 to 64
0 to 4
0, 1, 12
Parameters which can be set when the plug-in option (FR-A7NC) is mounted.
Description
Set the station number of the converter.
Set the transmission speed.
Extend the functions of the remote register.
(1) Station number setting
(Pr. 542)
Use Pr. 542 Communication station number (CC-Link) to set the station number of the converter. Set this parameter within the range of 1 to 64.
NOTE
Use different station numbers for different devices. (If different devices have the same station number, the communication cannot be performed properly. )
Connection example
CC-Link master module
Programmable controller remote I/O station
(occupies one station)
Converter
Remote device station
Inverter No.1
Remote device station
Inverter No.2
Remote device station
Station 00 Station 01 Station 02 Station 03 Station 04
Number of stations connected is 4.
REMARKS
Set consecutive numbers for the station numbers. (Do not skip a number in sequence like "station number 1 - station number 2
- station number 4".)
The station number does not have to match with the physical connection sequence. (There is no problem with having the physical connection sequence like "station number 1 - station number 3 - station number 4 - station number 2".)
One converter occupies one station (one remote device station).
"L.ERR" LED on FR-A7NC flickers when a setting is changed. The LED turns OFF when the setting becomes valid by turning the power OFF, then ON, or performing a converter reset.
(2) Baud rate setting
(Pr. 543)
Set the transmission speed. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the details of the transmission speed.)
Pr. 543 Setting
0 (Initial setting)
3
4
1
2
Transmission speed
156kbps
625kbps
2.5Mbps
5Mbps
10Mbps
REMARKS
"L.ERR" LED on FR-A7NC flickers when a setting is changed. The LED turns OFF when the setting becomes valid by turning the power OFF, then ON, or performing a converter reset.
3
109
HC2.book 110 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(3) CC-Link extended setting
(Pr. 544)
The functions of the remote register can be extended. Refer to page
for the details of the remote I/O signals and the remote registers.
Pr. 544 Setting
CC-Link Ver.
Description
0 (Initial setting)
1
12
1
Occupies one station (FR-A5NC compatible)
Occupies one station
Occupies one station, double setting 2
The program used for the conventional inverter series (FR-A5NC) can be used.
The upper 8 bits of RWw2 are not used for the link parameter extended setting.
When using the double setting of the CC-Link Ver.2, station data of the master station must be set to double.
(If the master station is CC-Link Ver.1, this setting is not available. )
REMARKS
The setting becomes valid after converter reset. (Refer to page
for the converter reset .
)
(4) I/O signal list
1)Remote I/O signals (32 points) (For details, refer to page
Device
No.
Signal Device No.
Signal
RYn0
RYn1
RYn2
RYn3
RYn4
RYn5
RYn6
Not used
Not used
Converter stop (terminal SOF function)
Monitor switching (terminal X1 function)
Monitor switching (terminal X2 function)
Converter reset (terminal RES function)
ROH inrush resistance overheat detection
(terminal ROH function)
RXn0
RXn1
RXn2
RXn3
RXn4
RXn5
RXn6
Not used
Not used
Converter ready (inverter run enable signal)
Converter reset(terminal RSO function)
During converter run(terminal CVO function)
Overload alarm(terminal Y1 function)
Power supply phase detection(terminal Y2 function)
RYn7
RYn8
Not used
Not used
RYn9 Not used
RYnA Not used
RXn7
RXn8
RXn9
RXnA
Output voltage match (terminal Y3 function)
Fault(terminal ABC function)
Not used
Not used
RYnB Not used
RYnC Monitor command
RYnD Not used
RYnE Not used
RYnF
RY(n+1)0 to
RY(n+1)7
Instruction code execution request
Reserved
RXnB
RXnC
RXnD
RXnE
RXnF
RX(n+1)0 to
RX(n+1)7
Not used
Monitoring
Not used
Not used
Instruction code execution completion
Reserved
RY(n+1)8
RY(n+1)9
Not used
(initial data process completion flag)
Not used
(initial data process request flag)
RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag
RX(n+1)8
RX(n+1)9
Not used
(initial data process request flag)
Not used
(initial data process completion flag)
RX(n+1)A Error status flag
RX(n+1)B Remote station ready
RY(n+1)B to
RY(n+1)F
Reserved
RX(n+1)C to
RX(n+1)F
Reserved
("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting. )
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 , input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For the available signals, refer to
.
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 , output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For the available signals, refer to
.
Output of the error status flag signal depends on the retry function setting.
110
HC2.book 111 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
2)Remote register (For the details, refer to
.)
I/O signals when one station (FR-A5NC compatible) in the CC-Link Ver.1 is occupied. ( Pr. 544 = "0")
Device No.
RWwn
RWwn+1
RWwn+2
RWwn+3
Description
Upper 8 Bits Lower 8 Bits
Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1
H00(arbitrary)
Not used
Instruction Code
Write data
Device No.
RWrn
RWrn+1
RWrn+2
RWrn+3
Description
Upper 8 Bits Lower 8 Bits
First monitor value
Second monitor value
Reply code
Read data
("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.)
The upper 8 bits are always H00 even if a value other than H00 is set.
I/O signals when one station in the CC-Link Ver.1 is occupied. ( Pr. 544 = "1")
Device No.
RWwn
RWwn+1
RWwn+2
RWwn+3
Upper 8 Bits
Description
Lower 8 Bits
Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1
Link parameter
extended setting
Not used
Instruction code
Write data
Device No.
RWrn
RWrn+1
RWrn+2
RWrn+3
("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.)
Upper 8 Bits
Description
Lower 8 Bits
First monitor value
Second monitor value
Reply code H00
Read data
I/O signals when the double setting is set in the CC-Link Ver.2 ( Pr. 544 = "12")
Device No.
RWwn
RWwn+1
RWwn+2
RWwn+3
RWwn+4
RWwn+5
RWwn+6
RWwn+7
Description
Upper 8 Bits
Monitor code 2
Lower 8 Bits
Monitor code 1
Not used
Link parameter
extended setting
Instruction code
Write data
Monitor code 3
Monitor code 4
Monitor code 5
Monitor code 6
Device No.
RWrn
RWrn+1
RWrn+2
RWrn+3
RWrn+4
RWrn+5
RWrn+6
RWrn+7
("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting. )
Description
Upper 8 Bits Lower 8 Bits
First monitor value
Second monitor value
Reply code
Read data
Third monitor value
Fourth monitor value
Fifth monitor value
Sixth monitor value
H00
3
111
HC2.book 112 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(5) Details of the remote I/O signals
The following device numbers are for the station number 1.
For the station number 2 and later, the device numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the correspondence between device numbers and stations numbers.)
Output signals (master module
converter (FR-A7NC))
Output signals from the master module are as follows: (Input signals to the converter)
Device No.
Signal Description
RY2
RY3
RY4
RY5
RY6
Converter stop
(terminal SOF function)
Monitor switching (terminal X1 function)
Monitor switching (terminal X2 function)
Converter reset
(terminal RES function)
ROH inrush resistance overheat detection
(terminal ROH function)
The functions assigned to terminals SOF, X1, X2, RES, and ROH are valid.
RYC Monitor command
Turning ON the monitor command signal (RYC) sets monitor values to the remote register RWr0, 1, and 4 to 7, and turns ON the monitoring signal
(RXC). While the monitor command (RYC) is ON, the monitor values are always updated.
RYF
RY1A
Instruction code execution request
Error reset request flag
Turning ON the instruction code execution request signal (RYF) executes the instruction code set in RWw2. The instruction code execution completion signal (RXF) turns ON after the instruction code execution is completed. When an instruction code execution error occurs, a value other than "0" is set in the reply code (RWr2).
Turning ON the error reset request flag at a converter fault resets the converter and turns OFF the error status flag (RX1A).
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 , input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. For the available signals, refer to
.
Note that X1, X2, RES, OH, and ROH signals cannot be controlled through the network.
Input signals (converter (FR-A7NC)
master module)
Input signals to the master module are as follows: (Output signals from the converter)
Device No.
Signal Description
RX2
RX3
RX4
RX5
RX6
Inverter run enable signal (RDY signal)
Converter reset (terminal RSO function)
During converter run (terminal CVO function)
Overload alarm (terminal Y1 function)
Power supply phase detection (terminal Y2 function)
Output voltage match (terminal Y3 function)
Fault output (terminal ABC function)
OFF: Converter operation disabled ON: Converter operation enabled
The functions assigned to terminals RSO, CVO, Y1, Y2, Y3, and ABC are valid.
RX7
RX8
RXC
RXF
RX1A
Monitoring
Instruction code execution completion
Error status flag
Turning ON the monitor command signal (RYC) sets monitor values to the remote registers RWr0, 1, and 4 to 7, and turns ON this signal. This signal turns OFF when the monitor command signal (RYC) turns OFF.
Turning ON the instruction code execution request signal (RYF) executes the instruction code set in RWw2, and after the completion, this signal turns
ON. This signal turns OFF when the instruction code execution request
(RYF) turns OFF.
This signal turns ON at a converter fault (the protective function activated).
Output of the error status flag signal depends on the retry function setting.
RX1B Remote station ready
This signal turns ON when the converter becomes ready after initial setting is completed following a power-ON or a hardware reset. This signal turns
OFF at a converter fault (the protective function activated). The signal is used as an interlock during the write to/read from the master module.
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 , output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. For the available signals, refer to
112
HC2.book 113 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(6) Details of the remote register
The following device numbers are for the station number 1.
For the station number 2 and later, the device numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the correspondence between device numbers and station numbers.)
Remote register (master module
converter (FR-A7NC))
Remote register definition
Device No.
RWw0
Remote register
Monitor code1/
Monitor code 2
RWw2
RWw3
Link parameter extended setting/
Instruction code
Write data
Description
Set the monitor code of the monitoring item.
Turning ON the RYC signal after setting this register sets the monitor data to RWr0/RWr1.
Set an instruction code
for an operation such as parameter read/write, alarm reference, and alarm clear. Turning ON the RYF signal after setting this register executes the instruction code. The RXF signal turns ON after the instruction code execution is completed.
When a value other than "0" is set to Pr. 544 CC-Link extended setting , upper 8 bits are used for the link parameter extended setting.
Example) Reading of Pr. 300 The instruction code is 0300H.
Set data for the instruction code set in RWw2. (When required)
Turn ON the RYF signal after setting RWw2 and this register.
Set "0" when the write data is not required.
RWw4
RWw5
RWw6
RWw7
Monitor code 3
Monitor code 4
Monitor code 5
Monitor code 6
Set the monitor code of the monitoring item. Turning ON the RYC signal after setting this register sets the monitor data to RWr . ( indicates a register number. (RWr4 to 7))
Remote register (converter (FR-A7NC)
master module)
Remote register definition
Device No.
RWr0
Remote register
First monitor value
RWr1
RWr2
Second monitor value
Reply code
Description
Turning ON the RYC signal sets the monitor value to the lower 8 bits of the specified monitor code
(RWw0).
Turning ON the RYC signal sets the monitor value to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code
(RWw0) except when "0" was set to the upper 8 bits.
Turning ON the RYF signal sets the reply code, which corresponds to the instruction code of
RWw2. The value "0" is set for a normal reply, and a value other than "0" is set for errors with data, mode, and other.
Reply code
When
Pr. 554 = 0
When
Pr. 554 0
Description Fault description
H0000
H0001
H0002
H0003
H00
H01
H02
H03
Normal
Write mode fault
Parameter selection fault
Setting range fault
No fault (Instruction codes are executed without any fault.)
Parameter write is attempted when the converter is running.
Unregistered code is set.
Set data exceeds the permissible range.
In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set. RWr3
RWr4
RWr5
RWr6
RWr7
Read data
Third monitor value
Fourth monitor value
Fifth monitor value
Sixth monitor value
Turning ON the RYC signal sets the monitor values to the specified monitor code (RWw ). ( indicates a register number. (RWw4 to 7))
3
113
HC2.book 114 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(7) Instruction code definition
Operation control and monitoring can be performed through CC-Link communication by setting the following instruction codes and corresponding data after setting parameters.
Set instruction codes using the remote register (RWw).
Definitions read by instruction codes are stored in the remote register (RWr).
Item
Input current
Input voltage
Bus voltage
Special monitor
Special monitor selection No.
Read/
Write
Read
Instruction
code
H6F
Read
Read
Read
Read
Write
H70
H71
H72
H73
HF3
Data Description
H0000 to HFFFF: Input current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A increments (55K or lower)
/ 0.1A increments (75K or higher)
H0000 to HFFFF: Input voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Bus voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3
H01 to H10: Monitor selection data
Special monitor selection No.
Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (First two digits are ignored.)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two latest fault records
H74 b15 b8b7
Second fault in past Latest fault b0
Fault record
Converter reset
Fault history batch clear
Parameter clear
All clear
Parameter
Link parameter
extended setting
H75 Fourth fault in past Third fault in past
Read H74 to H77
H76 Sixth fault in past Fifth fault in past
H77 Eighth fault in past Seventh fault in past
Write
Write
HFD
HF4
Refer to the fault data table
.
H9696: resets the converter.
H9696:clears the faults history as a batch.
Write HFC
All parameters return to the initial settings.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data.
( : Clear, : Not clear)
Refer to
page 188 for parameter clear, all clear, and communication parameters.
Clear Type
Parameter clear
All parameter clear
Data
H9696
H5A5A
H9966
H55AA
Communication
Pr.
When clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the operation, set the parameters again.
Performing clear will clear the instruction code HF3 and HFF settings.
Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA also clears the communication parameter settings back to the initial settings.
Read
Write
H00 to H5B Refer to the instruction code (
) and write and/or read parameter values
H80 to HDB as required.
When setting Pr. 100 and later, the link parameter extended setting must be set.
Read H7F
Write HFF
Parameter description is changed according to the H00 to H09 settings.
For the details of the settings, refer to the instruction code
.
REMARKS
Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
For the instruction codes HFF and HF3, their values are held once they are written but cleared to zero when an converter reset or all clear is performed.
114
HC2.book 115 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.25 Operation at a communication error (Pr. 500 to Pr. 502)
Operation at a communication error in the CC-Link communication can be selected.
Parameter
Number
500
501
502
Name
Communication error execution waiting time
Communication error occurrence count display
Stop mode selection at communication error
Initial value
0s
0
0
Setting range
0 to 999.8s
0
0, 3
Description
Set the waiting time for the communication error output after a communication line error occurrence.
Displays the cumulative count of communication error occurrences.
Write "0" to clear this cumulative count.
Set the converter’s operation at a communication line error or an option unit fault.
Parameters which can be set when the plug-in option (FR-A7NC) is mounted.
(1) Waiting time for the communication line error output after a communication error
(Pr. 500)
Waiting time for the communication error output after a communication line error occurrence can be set.
When a communication line error occurs and lasts longer than the time set in Pr. 500 , it is recognized as a communication error.
If the communication returns to normal within the time, it is not recognized as a communication error, and the operation continues.
Normal Error Normal Error
Communication line status
Communication error
(E.OP3)
Recognition
Pr. 500 setting time
Pr. 500 setting time
ON
Alarm signal(LF)
(
Pr. 502
= 3)
(2) Displaying and clearing the communication error count
(Pr. 501)
The cumulative count of communication error occurrences can be displayed. Write "0" to clear this cumulative count.
When a communication line error occurs, the setting of Pr. 501Communication error occurrence count display increases by one.
Normal
Count timing depending on communication line status
Error Normal
Incremented by 1
Error
Incremented by 1
NOTE
Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The error count is stored in EEPROM only once per hour. If power reset or converter reset is performed, Pr. 501 setting will be the one that is last stored to
EEPROM depending on the reset timing.
3
115
HC2.book 116 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(3) Converter operation at a communication error
(Pr. 502)
How the converter operates at a communication line error or an option unit fault can be set.
Setting description
Operation at an error occurrence
Fault description
Communication line
Communication option
Pr. 502 Setting
0 (initial value), 3
0 (initial value), 3
Converter operation
Operation continues
Operation stops
Indication
Normal indication
E.3 lit
Fault output
Not output
Output
When the communication returns to normal within the time period set in Pr. 500 , the communication option error (E.OP3) does not occur.
Operation at error detection after elapse of Pr. 500
Fault description
Communication line
Communication option
Pr. 502 Setting
0 (Initial setting)
3
0 (initial value), 3
Converter operation
Operation stops
Operation continues
Operation stops
Indication
E.OP3 lit
Normal indication
E.3 is lit
Fault output
Output
Not output
Output
Operation when no error is detected
Fault description
Communication line
Communication option
Pr. 502 Setting
0 (Initial setting)
3
0 (initial value), 3
Converter operation
Operation kept stopped
Operation continues
Operation kept stopped
Indication
E.OP3 kept lit
Normal indication
E.3 kept lit
Fault output
Kept output
Not output
Kept output
REMARKS
Communication line error [E.OP3 (fault data: HA3)] is an error that occurs on the communication line. Communication option error [E.3 (fault data:HF3)] is an error that occurs in the communication circuit inside the option.
Fault output indicates the fault output signal (ABC signal) and alarm bit output.
When the fault output setting is active, fault records are stored in the fault history.
When the fault output setting is not active, fault definition is overwritten to the fault history temporarily but not stored.
After the error is removed, the fault indication is reset, changing the display back to normal, and the last fault is displayed in the fault history.
3.4.26 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)
Storage device of the parameter setting can be changed to RAM only from EEPROM+RAM for the parameter writing from the RS-485 communication or the CC-Link communication. Use this setting when parameter settings need to be changed frequently.
Parameter
Number
342
Name
Communication EEPROM write selection
Initial value
0
Setting range
0
1
Description
Parameter settings written by communication are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
Parameter settings written by communication are written to the RAM.
When changing the parameter settings frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write them to the RAM. The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial setting)" (EEPROM write).
REMARKS
Turning OFF the converter's power supply clears the modified parameter settings when Pr. 342 = "1 (write only to RAM)".
Therefore, parameter settings at next power-ON will be the ones that are last stored to EEPROM.
116
HC2.book 117 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
3.4.27 Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel (Pr. 145, Pr. 990, Pr. 991)
Setting of the operation panel and parameter unit can be changed.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value
145
990
PU display language selection
PU buzzer control
0
1
Setting Range
6
7
4
5
0
1
2
3
0
1
991 PU contrast adjustment 58 0 to 63
Description
Japanese
English
German
French
Spanish
Italian
Swedish
Finnish
Without buzzer
With buzzer
0 : Light
63: Dark
(1) PU display language selection
(Pr. 145
)
You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) to another by setting Pr. 145 .
REMARKS
Parameter names and monitor names are always in English regardless of the Pr. 145 setting.
(2) Buzzer control
(Pr. 990)
Setting Pr. 990 = "1" makes the buzzer "beep" when you press the keys of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) and parameter unit (FR-PU07).
(3) PU contrast adjustment
(Pr. 991)
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the Pr. 991 setting value makes the contrast light.
Pr. 991 is displayed as a simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is mounted.
3
117
HC2.book 118 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Description of parameters
3.4.28 Terminal FM and AM calibration (calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901))
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal FM and AM to full scale deflection.
Parameter
Number
Name
C0(900) FM terminal calibration
Initial Value Setting Range
C1(901) AM terminal calibration
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU07).
Description
Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminal FM.
Calibrates the scale of the analog meter connected to terminal AM.
(1) FM terminal calibration
(C0 (Pr. 900))
The terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900 ), the meter connected to the converter can be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration resistor.
Using the pulse train output of the terminal FM, a digital display can be provided to connect a digital counter. The monitor value is 1440 pulses/s output at the full-scale value of monitor description list
(page 86) (Pr. 54 FM terminal function
selection) .
Indicator
1mA
FM
(+)
Calibration
1mA full-scale analog meter
(-) resistor ∗
SD
8VDC
T1
FM
1440 pulses/s(+)
(Digital indicator)
(-)
SD
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with
Pr. 49, Pr. 51, Pr. 53, Pr. 55, Pr. 56
Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) or parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used for calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far from the converter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, perform calibration using the operation panel or parameter unit.
Calibrate the terminal FM in the following procedure.
1) Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across terminals FM and SD of the converter. (Note the polarity. The terminal
FM is positive.)
2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.
3) Refer to the monitor description list
and set Pr. 54 .
When you selected a monitor that needs full-scale setting ( Pr. 54 = "1 to 3, 5, 7"), preset voltage or current that outputs 1440 pulses/s signal using Pr. 49, Pr. 51, Pr. 53, Pr. 55, and Pr. 56.
At 1440 pulses/s, the meter generally deflects to full-scale.
REMARKS
When outputting a signal such as input current, which cannot be adjusted to 100% easily by an operation, set Pr. 54 = "21"
(reference voltage output) for the calibration. 1440 pulses/s are output from the terminal FM.
The wiring length of the terminal FM should be 200m at maximum.
NOTE
The initial value of the calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900) is set to 1mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s FM output frequency when Pr. 49, Pr. 51, Pr. 53, Pr. 55, and Pr. 56 are in initial settings. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s.
118
HC2.book 119 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(2) AM terminal calibration
(C1 (Pr. 901))
Converter
AM
DC10V
Terminal AM is initially-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale status of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration parameter C1 (Pr. 901) allows the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.
5
Calibrate the AM terminal in the following procedure.
1) Connect a 0 to 10VDC meter (frequency meter) across converter terminals AM and 5. (Note the polarity. The terminal AM is positive.)
2) Refer to the monitor description list
and set Pr. 50 .
When you selected a monitor that needs full-scale setting ( Pr. 50 = "1 to 3, 5, 7"), preset power supply frequency or current that outputs 10V signal using Pr. 49, Pr. 51, Pr. 53, Pr. 55, and Pr. 56 .
REMARKS
When outputting a signal such as input current, which cannot be adjusted to 100% easily by an operation, set Pr. 50 = "21"
(reference voltage output) for the calibration. 10VDC is output from the terminal AM.
(3) How to calibrate the terminal FM when using the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
Display
(When
Pr. 54
= 5 (Power supply frequency))
Operation
1.
Confirm the operation status indicator and
operation mode indicator
2.
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.
Turn until appears.
4.
Press to display .
5.
Turn until appears.
Set to
C0 FM terminal calibration
.
6.
Press to enable setting.
8.
Turn to adjust the indicator needle
to the desired position.
9.
Press . Setting is complete.
-
+
The parameter number read previously appears.
C0 to C7 setting is enabled.
The monitor set to
Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection
is displayed.
Analog indicator
3
Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
By turning , you can read another parameter.
Press to return to the indication (step 4).
Press twice to show the next parameter ( ).
REMARKS
Calibration can be performed during operation.
119
HC2.book 120 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter clear / All parameter clear
3.5 Parameter clear / All parameter clear
POINT
Set "1" to Pr. CL Parameter clear, ALLC All parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection = "1".)
Refer to the parameter list on
for parameters cleared with this operation.
Operation
1.
Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2.
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.
Turn until " ( ) " appears.
4.
Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
Display
The parameter number read previously appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
5.
Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
6.
Press to set.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· Turn to read another parameter.
· Press to show the setting again.
· Press twice to show the next parameter.
NOTE
Converter operation stops during parameter clear and all parameter clear.
After the clear, the converter starts with the initial parameter settings.
120
HC2.book 121 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter copy and parameter verification
3.6 Parameter copy and parameter verification
PCPY Setting
2
3
0
1
Description
Cancel
Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination converter.
Verify parameters in the converter and operation panel.
REMARKS
When the copy destination is other than the FR-HC2 series converter or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy reading was stopped, "model error ( )" appears.
Refer to
page 188 for the availability of parameter copy.
When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy writing, write again or check the setting values by the parameter verification.
After a parameter copy, the operation of the converter is in a stop status. Reset the converter after a parameter copy is completed.
(1) Parameter copy
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple converters.
Display Operation
1.
Connect the operation panel to the
copy source converter.
2.
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.
Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
4.
Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
The parameter number previously read appears.
5.
Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
6.
Press to copy the source parameters
to the operation panel.
About 30s later
Flickers for about 30s
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
7.
Connect the operation panel to the
copy destination converter.
8.
After performing the steps 2 to 5,
turn to change it to " ".
9.
Press to write the parameters copied to
the operation panel to the destination converter.
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
10.
When copy is completed,
" " and " " flicker.
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
11.
After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination converter, always reset the converter,
e.g. switch power OFF once, before starting operation.
3
121
HC2.book 122 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Parameter copy and parameter verification
appears... Why? Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.
appears... Why? Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and flicker alternately
Appears when parameters are copied between the converter of 55K or lower and 75K or higher.
1. Set "0" (initial value) in Pr. 0 Simple mode selection .
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release .
Pr. 989 Setting
3. Reset Pr. 50 to Pr. 57.
55K or lower
10
75K or higher
100
(2) Parameter verification
Whether the same parameter values are set in other converters or not can be checked.
Operation
1.
Move the operation panel to the
converter to be verified.
Display
2.
Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
3.
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
5.
Press to read the currently set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.
Turn to change it to the set value
" "(parameter copy verification mode).
7.
Press to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
•
If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and flicker.
The parameter number read
previously appears.
Flickers for about 30s
•
Hold down to verify.
8.
It there is no difference, " " and " "
flicker to complete verification.
Flickering
Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
REMARKS
If a model other than the FR-HC2 series is verified, "model error ( )" appears.
122
HC2.book 123 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
4
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
This chapter provides the "PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Troubleshooting............................................................................ 124
Reset method of protective function .......................................... 124
List of fault and alarm indications............................................... 125
Causes and corrective actions .................................................... 126
Correspondences between digital and actual characters ........ 133
Check and clear of the faults history .......................................... 134
Check first when you have a trouble .......................................... 136
123
6
4
5
1
2
3
HC2.book 124 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Troubleshooting
4.1 Troubleshooting
When a fault occurs in the converter, the protective function activates to trip the converter, and the PU display automatically changes to one of the following fault or alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales representative.
Fault or alarm indication ............. When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically switches to a fault or alarm indication.
Resetting method ....................... When a fault occurs, the converter operation is kept stopped. Unless it is reset, the converter cannot restart.
When any fault occurs, take an appropriate corrective action, then reset the converter, and resume the operation.
Not doing so may lead to the converter fault and damage.
Converter fault or alarm indications are roughly categorized as below.
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) and parameter unit (FR-
PU07) is displayed. The converter continues its operation.
(2) Warning
The converter continues its operation even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a fault.
(3) Alarm
The converter continues its operation. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the converter trips and a fault signal is output.
4.2 Reset method of protective function
(1) Resetting the converter
The converter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal cumulative value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the converter.
Converter recovers about 1s after the reset.
Operation 1: ............. Using the operation panel, press to reset the converter.
(This can be performed only when a fault occurs. (Refer to
ON
Operation 2: ............. Switch power OFF once, then switch it ON again.
OFF
Converter
Operation 3: ............. Turn ON the reset signal (RES) for more than
0.1s. (If the RES signal is kept ON, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the converter is in a reset status.)
RES
SD
124
HC2.book 125 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
4.3 List of fault and alarm indications
List of fault and alarm indications
Error
message
Operation Panel Indication
E- - -
HOLD
Er1 rE1 to 4
Faults history
Operation panel lock
Parameter write error
Copy operation fault
Name Refer to page
Warning
Alarm
Fault
E.PE2
E.PUE
E.RET
E. 6
E. 7
CPU
E. 8
E. 9
E.IPF
E.UVT
E.ILF
E.OHT
E. 2
E. 3
E.OP3
E.PE
CP
SL
FN
E.OC2
E.OV2
E.THT
E.FIN
Err.
OL
PS
TH
MT
E.CTE
E.P24
E.CDO
E.IOH
E. 13
Error
Overload signal detection
PU stop
Electronic thermal relay pre-alarm
Maintenance signal output
Parameter copy
Power supply not detected
Fan fault
Overcurrent trip
Overvoltage trip
Converter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
Fin overheat
Instantaneous power failure
Undervoltage
Input phase loss
External thermal relay operation
HC2 dedicated board disconnection
Option fault
Communication option fault
Parameter storage device fault
Parameter storage device fault
PU disconnection
Retry count excess
CPU fault
Input power supply fault 1
Input power supply fault 2
Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
24VDC power output short circuit
Input current detection value exceeded
Inrush current limit circuit fault
Internal circuit fault
125
4
HC2.book 126 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
4.4 Causes and corrective actions
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. The converter continues its operation.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
HOLD
Operation panel lock
Description
Operation lock is set. Operation other than
is invalid.
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Press for 2s to release the lock.
—————
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Er1
Parameter write error
When you attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable parameter write.
When the PU and the converter cannot make normal communication.
When you attempted to set a parameter, of which setting cannot be changed during the converter operation.
Check if parameter writing is attempted while Pr. 77 Parameter write selection = "1".
Check for a connection failure between the PU and the converter.
Check that the converter is not operating.
Perform parameter writing by setting Pr. 77 Parameter write selection = "2".
Check the connection of the PU and the converter.
After stopping the operation, make parameter setting.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action rE1
Parameter read error
When a failure occurs at the operation panel side EEPROM while reading copied parameters.
—————
Perform parameter copy again.
Failure of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) might be the cause. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action rE2
Parameter write error
When a failure occurs at the operation panel side EEPROM while writing copied parameters.
Check if FWD or REV LED on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) is lit or flickering.
Failure of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) might be the cause. Please contact your sales representative.
rE3
Parameter verification error
When the data in the converter are different from the data in the operation panel.
When a failure occurs at the operation panel side EEPROM during parameter verification.
Check the parameter setting of the source converter against the setting of the destination converter.
Continue the verification by pressing .
Perform parameter verification again.
Failure of the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV) might be the cause. Please contact your sales representative.
126
HC2.book 127 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action rE4
Model error
Parameter write or parameter verification of the parameter copy function is performed to an invalid model.
When writing of copied parameters is attempted after reading of copied parameters is interrupted
Check that the verifying converter is the same model.
Check that the reading of copied parameter is not interrupted by switching OFF the power or by disconnecting the operation panel.
Check if parameter copy writing is attempted while Pr. 77 Parameter write selection = "1".
Perform parameter copy and parameter verification to the same model (FR-HC2 series).
Read the copied parameter again.
Perform parameter copy writing by setting Pr. 77 Parameter write selection = "2".
Operation Panel
Indication
Description
Corrective action
Err.
When RES signal is ON.
When the PU and the converter cannot make normal communication. (Contact faults of the connector)
This error may occur when the voltage at the input side of the converter drops.
When using a separate power source for the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) from the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), this error may appear at turning ON of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
Turn OFF the RES signal.
Check the connection between the PU and the converter.
Check the voltage on the input side of the converter.
(2) Warning
When a warning occurs, The converter continues its operation.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
OL
Checkpoint
Corrective action
FR-PU07 OL
Overload signal detection
Appears when the current limit function of the converter activates.
Check if the acceleration/deceleration time of the inverter is too short.
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
Check that the Pr. 22 Current limit level setting is appropriate.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time of the inverter longer.
Reduce the load weight.
Check that the peripheral devices are operating properly.
Current limit level of the output current can be set with Pr. 22 Current limit level . (Initial setting is 150%.) Set the current limit level higher with Pr. 22 Current limit level .
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
PS
PU stop
FR-PU07 PS
Stop with
of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection . ( For Pr. 75,
Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Turn the converter stop signal (SOF) ON to stop the converter operation, and press stop.
to release the PU
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
TH FR-PU07 TH
Electronic thermal relay pre-alarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the electronic thermal relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level.
If it reaches 100% of the preset level, converter overload trip (E. THT) occurs.
THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for THP signal, set "8
(positive logic)" or "108 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) . ( Refer to
Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
4
127
HC2.book 128 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
MT FR-PU07 MT
Maintenance signal output
Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the converter has reached a given time.
When the setting of Pr. 35 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial setting ( Pr. 35 = "9999"), this warning does not occur.
Check that the Pr. 34 Maintenance timer setting is larger than Pr. 35 Maintenance timer alarm output set time setting.
Setting "0" to Pr. 34 Maintenance timer erases the signal.
CP FR-PU07 CP
Parameter copy
Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or lower and 75K or higher.
Resetting of Pr. 50, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 53, Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56 and Pr. 57 is necessary.
Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release .
SL FR-PU07 SL
Power supply not detected
Appears when the power supply detection ends incompletely at a power failure.
Appears at the power ON of the control circuit when using separate power sources for the control circuit power source and for the main circuit power source. It is not a fault.
Check the power source and the wiring.
Check the wiring for power source detection.
Perform wiring correctly.
(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the converter continues its operation. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(Set "98" in any of
Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection). Refer to page 78 )
Operation Panel
FN FR-PU07
Indication
Name Fan alarm
FN
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan of the converter trips, when its speed drops, or when it does not operate as commanded by the Pr. 36 Cooling fan operation selection .
Check the cooling fan for a failure.
Failure of the cooling fan might be the cause. Please contact your sales representative.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the converter trips and a fault signal is output. Output of the connected inverter is also shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.OC2
FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OC
Overcurrent trip
Stops the converter operation when the input current exceeds the specified level during the converter operation.
Check for sudden load change.
Check for output short-circuit.
Check that the wiring is performed correctly.
Check that any power supply failure did not occur.
Keep the load stable.
Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
Check the wiring.
Check the power supply.
128
HC2.book 129 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.OV2
FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OV
Overvoltage trip
If the converter's internal main circuit DC voltage reaches or exceeds the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the converter operation.The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check for sudden load change and excessive regeneration.
Check that any power supply failure did not occur.
Keep the load stable.
Check the power supply.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
E.THT
FR-PU07 Inv. Overload
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
For the protection of transistor, electronic thermal relay activates in inverse-time characteristics against the converter input to stop the converter operation.
Check the motor for the use under overload.
Check if the inverter, which exceeds the converter capacity, is being used.
Reduce the load.
Reconsider the choices of the inverter and the converter.
Resetting the converter initializes the cumulative value of the internal thermal relay.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
E.FIN
FR-PU07 H/Sink O/Temp
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Fin overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is activated and the output of the converter operation stops.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink overheat protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for FIN signal, set "10 (positive logic)" or "110 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 11 to Pr. 16
(output terminal function selection) . (
Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
Check for heatsink clogging.
Check that the cooling fan is not stopped. (Check that is not displayed on the operation panel.)
Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Clean the heatsink.
Replace the cooling fan.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.IPF
FR-PU07 Inst. Pwr. Loss
Instantaneous power failure
When a power failure occurs (or when power input to the converter is shut off), the instantaneous power failure protection function activates to stop the converter operation and prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for 100ms or longer, the alarm warning output is not provided, and the converter (inverter) restarts when the start signal is ON upon power restoration. In some operating status
(load magnitude, acceleration/deceleration time setting of the inverter, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
The IPF signal is output when a power failure is detected. (
Identify the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
Recover the instantaneous power failure.
Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (
4
E.UVT
FR-PU07 Under Voltage
Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the converter decreases, the control circuit will not perform its normal functions.
The converter operation is stopped when the power supply voltage decreases to about 150VAC (about
300VAC for the 400V class) or lower.
Check for start of large-capacity motor.
Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
129
HC2.book 130 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.ILF
FR-PU07
Input phase loss
Converter trips when one phase of the three phase power input is lost.
Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Wire the cables properly.
Repair a break portion in the cable.
Input phase loss
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.OHT
FR-PU07 OH Fault
External thermal relay operation
If an overheat protection device such as a thermostat activates, the converter operation is stopped.
This function is available when "4" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 (input terminal function selection) .
This protective function is not available in the initial status (OH signal is not assigned).
Check for the overheat of the overheat protection peripheral devices such as a thermostat.
Check that the value "4" (OH signal) is set correctly to any of Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 (input terminal function selection) .
Check the wiring.
Even if the thermostat restarts automatically, the converter does not restart unless it is reset.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E. 2 FR-PU07 Fault 2
HC2 dedicated board disconnection
Stops the converter operation when contact fault between the converter and the connecting part of the HC2 dedicated board occurs.
Check that HC2 dedicated board is connected to the connector securely.
Check for excess electrical noises around the converter.
Connect the HC2 dedicated board securely.
Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the converter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. 3 FR-PU07 Fault 3
Option fault
Stops the converter operation if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the converter and communication option occurs.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check that the plug-in option unit is plugged into the connector securely.
Check for excess electrical noises around the converter.
Check the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option.
Connect the plug-in option securely.
Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the converter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (
Refer to the instruction manual of each option )
Operation panel indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.OP3
FR-PU07 Option slot alarm 3
Communication option fault
Stops the converter operation when a communication line fault occurs in the communication option.
Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
Check that the plug-in option unit is plugged into the connector securely.
Check for a break in the communication cable.
Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
Check the option function setting, etc.
Connect the plug-in option securely.
Check the connection of communication cable.
Connect the terminating resistor correctly.
130
HC2.book 131 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.PE
FR-PU07 Corrupt Memry
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Stops the converter operation if a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM fault)
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" to Pr. 342 to enable RAM write. Note that powering OFF returns the converter to the status before RAM write.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
E.PE2
FR-PU07 PR storage alarm
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Stops the converter operation if a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM fault)
—————
Please contact your sales representative.
E.PUE
FR-PU07 PU Leave Out
PU disconnection
This function stops the converter operation if communication between the converter and PU is suspended, e.g. the parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/ disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection . This protective function is not available in the initial setting ( Pr.
75 = "14").
Check that no loose point exists in the installation of FR-DU07-CNV or the parameter unit (FR-PU07).
Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Install FR-DU07-CNV or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) securely.
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.RET
FR-PU07 Retry No Over
Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function stops the converter operation.
This function is available only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set. When the initial value ( Pr.
67 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Find the cause of the fault occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this fault indication.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E. 6
E. 7 FR-PU07
Fault 6
Fault 7
CPU CPU fault
CPU fault
Stops the converter operation if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the converter.
Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the converter.
Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.8
FR-PU07 Fault 8
Input power supply fault 1
When a fault is detected in the power supply frequency.
When the phase detection cannot be performed for the normal power supply.
When an overvoltage occurs during power failure or at an input phase loss.
When the power supply amplitude changes suddenly.
When any of the above occurs, it is regarded as a power supply fault, and the converter operation and the inverter output are stopped.
Check the power source and the wiring.
Perform wiring correctly.
4
131
HC2.book 132 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.9
FR-PU07 Fault 9
Input power supply fault 2
When the converter operation is stopped continuously due to the fluctuation of input voltage or input current, it is regarded as a power supply fault, and the converter operation and the inverter output are stopped.
Check the power source and the wiring.
Perform wiring correctly.
Adjust Pr. 80 Voltage control proportional gain Pr. 81 Voltage control integral gain Pr. 82 Current control proportional gain , and Pr. 83 Current control integral gain .
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.CTE
FR-PU07 E.CTE
Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts OFF the power output and stops the converter operation. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-
485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts OFF the power output.
To reset, enter RES signal or switch power OFF, then ON again.
Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable.
Check if the RS-485 terminals are used.
Check the PU and cable.
The RS-485 terminals cannot be used.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
E.P24
FR-PU07 E.P24
24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts OFF the power output.
At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The converter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal.
To reset, use the operation panel or switch power OFF, then ON again.
Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Repair the short-circuited portion.
E.CDO
FR-PU07 OC detect level
Input current detection value exceeded
Stops the converter operation when the input current exceeds Pr. 25 Input current detection level setting.
This function is available when "1" is set to Pr. 28 Input current detection operation selection . When the initial value ( Pr. 28 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Check the settings of Pr. 25 Input current detection level , Pr. 26 Input current detection signal delay time, Pr. 27 Input current detection signal retention time, Pr. 28 Input current detection operation selection (
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Checkpoint
Corrective action
E.IOH
FR-PU07 Inrush overheat
Inrush current limit circuit fault
Stops the converter operation when the inrush current limit contactor does not turn ON, a thermostat of the limit resistor activates, or the filter capacitor alarm detector activates. (Filter capacitor alarm detector is only available for 560K.) Inrush current limit circuit is faulty.
When the terminal PC and SD are shorted, the ROH signal turns OFF and the converter operation stops.
Check that ROH1 and ROH2 of the outside box are respectively connected to ROH and SD of the converter.
Check that the inrush current limit circuit contactor and buffer circuit are not damaged.
Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Check that the output terminal of the filter capacitor alarm detector is connected to the terminal ROH.
Check that thermostats of the limit resistor are connected to terminal ROH.
Check that terminals PC and SD are not shorted.
Connect ROH1 and ROH2 of the outside box to ROH and SD of the converter respectively.
Check the wiring of the output terminal of the filter capacitor alarm detector and the terminal ROH.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Check the wiring between the thermostats of the limit resistor and terminal ROH.
Check the wiring between terminals PC and SD.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
132
HC2.book 133 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Correspondences between digital and actual characters
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Corrective action
E.13
FR-PU07
Internal circuit fault
Stops the converter operation when an internal circuit fault occurs.
Please contact your sales representative.
Fault 13
NOTE
If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
4.5 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel:
Actual Digital Actual Digital Actual Digital
2
3
4
0
1
7
8
5
6
9
H
I
F
G
J
L
C
D
E
A
B
V r
T
U
-
O o
M
N
P
S
4
133
HC2.book 134 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Check and clear of the faults history
4.6 Check and clear of the faults history
(1) Check and clear of the faults history
Monitor/frequency setting
[Operation panel is used for operation]
Parameter setting
[Parameter setting change]
Faults history
[Operation for displaying faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists, is displayed.
Input current Input voltage
Flickering Flickering
Flickering
Flickering
Press the setting dial.
Press the setting dial.
Energization time
∗
Flickering
Bus voltage
Flickering
Flickering
Press the setting dial.
The cumulative energization time is accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When using the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV), the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) by regarding 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
134
HC2.book 135 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Check and clear of the faults history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
Set Er.CL Fault history clear = "1" to clear the faults history.
Operation
1.
Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2.
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.
Turn until (faults history clear)
appears.
4.
Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
5.
Turn to change it to the
setting value " ".
Display
The parameter number previously read appears.
6.
Press to set.
Flicker ··· Faults history clear complete!!
· Press to read another parameter.
· Press to show the setting again.
· Press twice to show the next parameter.
135
4
HC2.book 136 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Check first when you have a trouble
4.7 Check first when you have a trouble
Trouble
Converter does not operate properly.
Checkpoint
Check the connection.
Check if the wiring is performed correctly.
Check if appropriate power supply voltage is applied.
Check if the phase sequence is correct.
POWER lamp is unlit.
Charge lamp is unlit.
Reactor heats up abnormally.
Unable to run the inverter.
Breaker trips.
If the phase sequence is correct, check for the short circuit across terminals SOF and SD and across terminals RES and SD.
Check the connection.
Check if the connection is performed correctly.
Check if the main circuit terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 are wired correctly.
Check for any damage to the inrush current limit resistor
Check the connection.
Check if the connection is performed correctly.
Check if the main circuit terminals R4/L14, S4/L24 and T4/L34 are wired correctly.
Check the connection.
Check if the order of the reactor 1 and the reactor 2 is correct.
Check the setting.
Check if the parameter setting of the inverter is correct. (Parameter setting method differs by the inviter series. For the parameter setting method, refer to page
Abnormal acoustic noise is generated from the reactor.
Check if the phase sequence is correct.
Check the connection.
Check if the wiring is performed correctly.
Check if appropriate power supply voltage is applied.
Check if the phase sequence is correct.
Check the above points, identify the cause of the trip and remove it before turning ON the breaker power .
136
HC2.book 137 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
5
MAINTENANCE
AND INSPECTION
This chapter provides the "MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Inspection items............................................................................ 138
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers .. 145
5
137
6
1
2
3
4
HC2.book 138 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
The converter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the converter for an inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the converter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.
CAUTION
Reactor 1 and reactor 2 are extremely hot. Take caution not to get burned.
5.1 Inspection items
5.1.1
Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
1) Improper installation environment
2) Cooling system fault
3) Abnormal vibration, abnormal noise
4) Abnormal overheat, discoloration
5.1.2
Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault................Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening..........The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes, etc. Check and tighten them.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque.
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
138
HC2.book 139 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
5.1.3
Daily and periodic inspection list
Area of
Inspection
Inspection Item
Surrounding environment
Description
Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity, dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist, etc.
General
Main Circuit
Overall unit
Power supply voltage
General
Conductors, cables
Transistor /
Reactor
Terminal block
Check for unusual vibration and noise.
Check for dirt, oil, and other foreign material.
Check that the main circuit voltage and control circuit voltage are normal.
(1) Check with megger (across main circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
(2) Check for loose screws and bolts.
(3) Check for overheat traces on the parts.
(4) Check for stain.
(1) Check conductors for distortion.
(2) Check cable sheaths for breakage and deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.).
Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase of whining sound.
Check for a damage.
Smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor
(1) Check for liquid leakage.
(2) Check for safety valve projection and bulge.
(3) Visual check
Relay / Contactor
Operation check
Check that the operation is normal and no chatter is heard.
Check that no fault is found in protective and display circuits in a sequence protective operation test.
Control
Circuit
Protective circuit
Cooling system
Display
Parts check
Overall
(1) Check for unusual odor and discoloration.
(2) Check for serious rust development.
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor
(1) Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deformation trace.
(2) Visual check
Cooling fan
Heatsink
(1) Check for unusual vibration and noise.
(2) Check for loose screws and bolts.
(3) Check for stain.
(1) Check for clogging.
Air filter, etc.
Indication
(2) Check for stain.
(1) Check for clogging.
(2) Check for stain.
(1) Check that display is normal.
(2) Check for stain.
Meter Check that reading is normal.
Interval
Daily
Periodic
Corrective Action at
Alarm Occurrence
Improve the environment.
Customer's
Check
Check alarm location and retighten.
Clean
Inspect the power supply.
Contact the manufacturer.
Retighten.
Contact the manufacturer.
Clean.
Contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer.
Replace the cooling fan.
Retighten.
Clean.
Clean.
Clean.
Clean or replace.
Clean or replace.
Contact the manufacturer.
Clean.
Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the converter.
One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
NOTE
Continuous use of a leaked, deformed, or degraded smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor (as shown in the table above) may lead to a burst, breakage, or fire. Replace such capacitor without delay.
5
139
HC2.book 140 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
5.1.4
Checking the converter module
<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34, P/+, N/-)
(2) Prepare a tester. (Use 100 range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the converter terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34, P/+, N/- and check the electric continuity.
NOTE
Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
At the time of electric discontinuity, the measured value is almost . When there is an instantaneous electric continuity, due to the smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate . At the time of electric continuity, the measured value is several to several tens of . If all measured values are almost the same, although these values are not constant depending on the module type and tester type, the modules are without fault.
(3) <Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>
Converter module
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
TR6
R4/L14
P
S4/L24
P
T4/L34
P
R4/L14
N
S4/L24
N
T4/L34
N
Tester Polarity Measured
Value
P
R4/L14
P
S4/L24
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
P
T4/L34
Discontinuity
Continuity
N Continuity
R4/L14 Discontinuity
N Continuity
S4/L24 Discontinuity
N Continuity
T4/L34 Discontinuity
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
TR1 TR2
TR4 TR5
TR3
P/+
TR6
N/-
C
5.1.5
Cleaning
Always run the converter in a clean status.
When cleaning the converter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent.
NOTE
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the surface paint of the converter to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel and parameter unit are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
140
HC2.book 141 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
5.1.6
Replacement of parts
The converter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or fault of the converter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Estimated lifespan interval of the converter parts is shown in the below table.
Part Name
Cooling fan
Main circuit smoothing capacitor
On-board smoothing capacitor
Relays
Fuse inside the converter (160K or higher)
Estimated lifespan
10 years
10 years
10 years
Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40 C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Input current: 80% of the converter rated current
REMARKS
For parts replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
Description
Replace (as required)
Replace (as required)
Replace the board (as required)
As required
Replace (as required)
(1) Cooling fan
The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration are noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
NOTE
For parts replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
Removal (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H110K)
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
FR-HC2-7.5K, 15K
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
2) Disconnect the fan connectors.
3) Remove the fan.
FR-HC2-30K or higher
FR-HC2-H30K to H110K
Fan cover
Fan
Fan connection connector
FR-HC2-7.5K, 15K
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
(Example for FR-HC2-7.5K)
Fan cover
Fan ∗
Fan connection connector
∗
The number of cooling fans differs
according to the converter capacity.
5
FR-HC2-30K or higher
FR-HC2-H30K to H110K
(Example for FR-HC2-55K)
141
HC2.book 142 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
Reinstallation (FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K, FR-HC2-H7.5K to H110K)
1)After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2)Reconnect the fan connectors.
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
FR-HC2-30K or higher
FR-HC2-H30K to H110K
FR-HC2-15K
3)Reinstall the fan cover.
1. Insert hooks into holes.
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks into holes.
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound.
FR-HC2-7.5K, 15K
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
(Example for FR-HC2-7.5K)
FR-HC2-30K or higher
FR-HC2-H30K to H110K
(Example for FR-HC2-55K)
NOTE
Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the converter life to be shorter.
Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the converter circuits are charged with voltage even after power
OFF, replace fans only when the converter cover is on the converter to prevent an electric shock accident.
142
HC2.book 143 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
Removal (FR-HC2-H160K or higher)
1) Remove the fan cover.
2) Remove the fan connector, then remove the fan block.
3) Remove the fan fixing screws, then remove the fan. (Make sure to remove the fan cable from the clamp of the fan block beforehand.)
2)
3)
Fan fixing screws
Fan ∗
Fan connection connector
Fan block
Fan cover
1)
Unlock the clamp, and pull out the cable.
∗
The number of cooling fans differs
according to the converter capacity.
(Example for FR-HC2-H560K)
Reinstallation (FR-HC2-H160K or higher)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW
2) Reinstall the fan by referring to the above figure. Tighten the fan with the fan fixing screws.
(Tightening torque: 0.7N m)
NOTE
Installing the fan in the opposite direction of air flow can cause the converter life to be shorter.
Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the converter circuits are charged with voltage even after power
OFF, replace fans only when the converter cover is on the converter to prevent an electric shock accident.
5
143
HC2.book 144 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Inspection items
(2) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc. The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and operating conditions. When the converter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
When a certain period of time has elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if the life will be expired soon).
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Explosion-proof valve: Check for extreme valve expansion, and movement of the value.
4) Check for external crack, discoloration, liquid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 85% of the rating.
(3) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).
(4) Fuse inside the converter (160K or higher)
A fuse is used inside the converter. Surrounding air temperature and operating condition affect the life of fuses. When the converter is used in a normal air-conditioned environment, replace its fuse after about 10 years.
144
HC2.book 145 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
5.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
Measurement method of voltage and current at each section
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits with the instruments given below.
When installing meters etc. on the output side of the converter
When the converter-to-motor wiring length is long, especially in the 400V class, the meters may generate heat due to lineto-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating.
Voltage is output between the terminal P and N of the converter, and it can be measured using a moving-coil type meter
(tester). The voltage changes by the power supply voltage, but it decreases when a load is applied.
Outside box
Power supply
W11
W12
W13
Vu
Vv
Au
Reactor 1
Av
Aw
Filter capacitor
Limit resistor
Inrush current limit MC
Reactor 2
Converter
R4
/L14
P/+
S4
/L24
T4
/L34
N/-
V
+
To the Inverter
-
Vw
Power supply
[Examples of Measuring Points and Instruments]
Reactor 1
Outside box
Filter capacitor
Limit resistor
Inrush current limit MC
Reactor 2
Converter
R4
/L14
P/+
S4
/L24
T4
/L34
N/-
V
+
To the Inverter
-
Recommended product : YOKOGAWA251
DIGITAL POWER METER
(Voltage, current, power, and power factor can be measured.)
[Examples of Measuring Points and Instruments]
Operation principle and application of electric meters
Type
Moving-coil type
Moving-iron meter
Ammeter type Air-core coil
Symbol Operation Principle
Uses kinetic power generated between the magnetic field of a permanent magnet and the current that flows through the moving-coil.
Command
DC
(average value)
Uses kinetic power generated between the the moving-iron and the magnetic field of the current that flows though the fixed coil.
AC
(effective value)
Uses kinetic power generated between the currents that flow through two different coils.
AC/DC
(effective value)
Applicable meter
Voltmeter/ammeter/ resistance meter/ thermometer/flux meter/speed meter
Voltmeter/ammeter
Wattmeter/ voltmeter/ammeter
Characteristic
High sensitivity and commonly used.
Energy saving, small influence of magnetic field
Strong structure and inexpensive,
Large influence from external magnetic field, frequency, and waveform
Scale is divided equally when using a wattmeter.
Large influence from external magnetic field, high energy consumption
This can be used as a standard meter for AC and DC.
5
145
HC2.book 146 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
Measuring Points and Instruments
Item
Power supply voltage
V
1
Measuring Point
Across R and S
Across S and T
Across T and R
Measuring Instrument
Moving-iron type AC voltmeter
Remarks
(Reference Measured Value)
Commercial power supply
Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation
Power supply side current l
1
Power supply side power
P
1
R, S, T and
Across R and S
Across S and T Across T and R
Electrodynamic type singlephase wattmeter
P
1
=W
11
+W
12
+W
13
(3-wattmeter method)
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side power.
Power supply side power factor
Pf
1 Pf
1
=
P
1
3V
1 l
1
100%
Converter output
R, S, T line current
Across P and N
Moving-iron type AC ammeter
Moving-coil type
(such as tester)
Converter LED display is lit.
1.35
V
1
Maximum 380V (200V class) and 760V
(400V class) during the regenerative driving
Approximately 5VDC at maximum frequency
(without indicator)
Indicator signal
Input signal
Fault signal
Across FM(+) and SD
RES, SOF, X1, X2, Across
ROH(+) and SD
Across A and C
Across B and C
Moving-coil type
(such as tester)
(internal resistance 50k or more)
Moving-coil type
(such as tester)
T1
DC8V
Pulse width T1: Adjust with Pr. 900
When open
20 to 30VDC
ON voltage: 1V or less
Electric continuity check
[Normal] [Abnormal]
Across A and C Discontinuity Continuity
Across B and C Continuity Discontinuity
5.2.1
Insulation resistance test using megger
For the converter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)
Power supply
500VDC megger
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
Converter
P/+
N/-
Inverter
Earth (ground)
NOTE
Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the converter so that the test voltage is not applied to the converter.
For the electric continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.
5.2.2
Pressure test
Do not conduct a pressure test. Deterioration may occur.
146
HC2.book 147 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
6
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter provides the "SPECIFICATIONS" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Rated specifications ..................................................................... 148
Common specifications ............................................................... 149
Outline dimensions....................................................................... 150
147
6
4
5
1
2
3
HC2.book 148 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Rated specifications
6.1 Rated specifications
200V
Model name FR-HC2 K
Applicable inverter capacity (kW)
Rated output capacity (kW)
Rated input voltage (V)
Rated input current (A)
Permissible power supply voltage fluctuation
Permissible power supply frequency fluctuation
Input power factor
Power supply capacity (kVA)
Protective structure of the converter
Cooling system
Approximate mass (kg)
7.5
15 30 55 75
7.5
15 30 55 75
10.7
19.8
38 71 92
33
7
Three-phase 200V to 220V 50Hz/200V to 230V 60Hz
61 115 215 278
150% 60s
170V to 242V 50Hz
14
170V to 253V 60Hz
5%
0.99 or more (when load ratio is 100%)
25
Enclosed type (IP20)
47 88
Open type (IP00)
170V to 230V
50Hz/60Hz
110
12
Forced air cooling
24 39 53
400V
Model name FR-HC2-H
Applicable inverter capacity (kW)
Rated output capacity (kW)
Rated input voltage (V)
Rated input current (A)
Permissible power supply voltage fluctuation
Permissible power supply frequency fluctuation
Input power factor
Power supply capacity (kVA)
Protective structure of the
Cooling system
Approximate mass (kg)
7.5
15 30 55 75 110 160 220 280
7.5
11.0
17
15
20.2
31
30
37
57
323V to 506V 50/60Hz
55 75 110 160 220
73 92 135 192 264
Three-phase 380V to 460V 50Hz/60Hz
110 139 203 290 397
150% 60s
280
336
506
323V to 460V 50/60Hz
14 26
Enclosed type
47
5%
0.99 or more (when load ratio is 100%)
90 113 165 235 322
43
Open type (IP00)
Forced air cooling
37 56 120 120
410
400
400
476
716
580
560
560
660
993
804
9 9 26 160 250 250
Model name of the 400V class ends with H.
The permissible voltage imbalance ratio is 3% or less. (Imbalance ratio = (highest voltage between lines - average voltage between three lines ) / average voltage between three lines 100)
DC output capacity when the input voltage is 200VAC (400V for the 400V class)
Change the MC power supply stepdown transformer tap according to the input voltage.
The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the converter's rated input current. For repeated duty, allow time for the converter and the inverter to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The protective structure is IP40 for FR-DU07-CNV (except the PU connector) and IP00 for the outside box (220K or lower) and the reactor regardless of their capacities.
When the hook of the converter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the protective structure changes to the open type (IP00).
Mass of FR-HC2 alone.
148
HC2.book 149 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Common specifications
6.2 Common specifications
tion Control method
Power supply frequency range
PWM control
50Hz to 60Hz
Current limit level Current limit value selectable (0 to 220% variable)
Input signal (Five terminal)
Output signal
Open collector output (Five terminals)
Relay output (One terminal)
Operating status
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 3 to Pr. 7 (input terminal function selection) : converter stop, monitor switching, converter reset, external thermal relay, and inrush resistance overheat detection.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 11 to Pr. 16 (output terminal function selection) : inverter run enable signal, converter reset, converter running, overload alarm, power supply phase detection, output voltage match, instantaneous power failure detection, regenerative drive recognition, electronic thermal relay pre-alarm, fan alarm, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, during retry, input current detection, zero current detection, life alarm, maintenance timer, instantaneous power failure detection hold, alarm, and fault output.
For meter
Pulse train output
(Max. 2.4kHz: one terminal)
Analog output
(Max. 10VDC: one terminal)
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 50 AM terminal function selection (analog output) : power supply frequency, input current, input voltage, converter output voltage, electronic thermal relay load factor, input power, reference voltage output.
Operation panel
(FR-DU07-CNV)
Operating status
Power supply frequency, input current, input voltage, fault or alarm indication, converter output voltage, electronic thermal relay load factor, cumulative energization time, cumulative power, input power, input power (with regenerative display), I/O terminal status
, power/regenerative drive indication
Fault definition is displayed when a fault occurs. Past eight fault records and the data right before the fault (input voltage/current/bus voltage/cumulative energization) are stored.
Parameter unit
(FR-PU07)
Fault record
Interactive guidance
Function (help) for operation guide
Protective/warning function
Protective function
Warning functions
Surrounding air temperature
Ambient humidity
Atmosphere
Overcurrent, overvoltage, converter protection thermal, fin overheat, instantaneous power failure, undervoltage, input phase loss, HC2 dedicated board disconnection, input power
supply fault, external thermal relay operation
, parameter error, PU disconnection
, retry count excess
converter CPU fault, operation panel power supply short circuit,
24VDC power output short circuit, input current detection value exceeded
, inrush current limit circuit fault, internal circuit fault, option fault
, communication option fault
.
Fan alarm, overload signal detection, electronic thermal relay pre-alarm, PU stop,
, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel
lock, parameter copy alarm, no-phase detection
-10 C to +50 C (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20 C to +65 C
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/ vibration
Maximum 1,000m above sea level, 5.9m/s
2
or less
at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV).
Can be displayed only on the option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
This protective function is not available in the initial status.
This protective function is enabled when FR-A7NC is mounted.
2.9m/s
2
or less for the 160K or higher.
149
6
HC2.book 150 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
6.3 Outline dimensions
6.3.1
Converter (FR-HC2)
(1) 200V class
FR-HC2-7.5K
2φ 6 hole
P.CPY PWR
REGEN .......
DRIVE
PSCLR
FAN
195
220
6
Rating plate
170
10
211
FR-HC2-15K
2-
φ
10 hole
P.CPY PWR
REGEN DRIVE
PSCLR
FAN
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 7kg
230
250
10
Rating plate
190
10.5
242 (Unit: mm)
Mass: 12kg
150
HC2.book 151 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HC2-30K
2φ 20 hole
Eybolt: 2-M8 ∗
P.CPY PWR
REGEN .......
DRIVE
PSCLR
298
Outline dimensions
2φ 10 hole
(102) 93
FAN
FR-HC2-55K
2φ 20 hole
Eybolt: 2-M8 ∗
P.CPY PWR
REGEN DRIVE
PSCLR
338
270
325
280
Rating plate 195
3.2
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
2-
φ
10 hole
(150) 100
FAN
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 24kg
10
300
370
282
Rating plate
250
3.2
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 39kg
151
6
HC2.book 152 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HC2-75K
2φ 25 hole
Eyebolt : 2-M10 ∗
436
P.CPY PWR
REGEN DRIVE
PSCLR
2φ 25 hole
2φ 12 hole
(93) 207
FAN
(2) 400V class
FR-HC2-H7.5K, H15K
2-
φ
6 hole
400
465
430
12
Rating plate 300
3.2
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 53kg
FAN
6
195
220
Rating plate 190
10
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 9kg
211
152
HC2.book 153 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HC2-H30K
2φ 20 hole
Eyebolt: 2-M8
∗
298
270
2φ 10 hole
Outline dimensions
(102) 93
FAN
FR-HC2-H55K
2φ 20 hole
Eyebolt: 2-M8 ∗
270
325
280
10
338
300
Rating plate 195
3.2
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 26kg
2φ 10 hole
(142) 100
FAN
10
300
370
327
250
3.2
Rating plate
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 43kg
153
6
HC2.book 154 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HC2-H75K
2-
20 hole 298
270
Eyebolt: 2-M8
PSCLR
P.CPY PWR
REGEN .......
DRIVE
2-
10 hole
(142) 100
FAN
10
270
325
282
250
3.2
Rating plate
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 37kg
FR-HC2-H110K
2-
φ
25 hole
Eyebolt : 2-M10
∗
PSCLR
P.CPY PWR
REGEN
436
400
2-
φ
25 hole
2-
φ
12 hole (93) 207
FAN
400
465
430
12
300
3.2
Rating plate
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 56kg
154
HC2.book 155 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HC2-H160K, H220K
3φ 12 hole 200 200
P.CPY PWR
REGEN .......
DRIVE
PSCLR
FAN
Outline dimensions
12
49 200
498
432
200 49 Rating plate
380
3.2
22
4-
φ
16 hole
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 120kg
FR-HC2-H280K
2- 30 hole
300
400
300
2- 16 hole
3- 12 hole
Eyebolt : 2-M12 ∗
P.CPY PWR
REGEN DRIVE
PSCLR
(174) 206
FAN
2- 16 hole
12
300
680
614
300 Rating plate
3.2
380
The eyebolt is enclosed with the product. Use it as required.
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 160kg
155
6
HC2.book 156 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HC2-H400K, H560K
3φ 12 hole
315
498
315
2φ 24 hole
FAN
12
315
790
685
315
440
4.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 250kg
156
HC2.book 157 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
6.3.2
Reactor 1 (FR-HCL21)
Check that the capacity of the reactor 1 is same as the capacity of the converter.
(1) 200V class
FR-HCL21-7.5K, 15K
Outline dimensions
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Rating plate
Within D2
Model
FR-HCL21-7.5K
FR-HCL21-15K
FR-HCL21-30K
W
130
160
W1 0.5
W 2
W1
50
75
D1
+0
-2.5
D 2
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
4-M6 hole
H
Within 150
167 5
D
98
124
D1
86
107
D2
50
60
Mass
4.2kg
7.0kg
(Unit: mm)
R/L1 R2/
L12
S/L2 S2/
L22
T/L3 T2/
L32
Within 195
Rating plate
75
180
Within 185
87 +0
-2.5
100 2
Within 65 Within 85
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
4-M6 hole
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 10.7kg
6
157
HC2.book 158 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL21-55K
Rating plate
∗ Enlarged view of section A
T2
L32
FR-HCL21-75K
Crimping terminal for
6-M12 screws
(80-M12)
Within 105
R/L1
R2/
L12
S/L2
S2/
L22
T/L3
T2/
L32
∗ A
75 0.5
205 2
Within 210
97 +0
-2.5
116 2
Within 140 58 2.5
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
4-M6 hole
Rating plate
∗ Enlarged view of section A
T2
L32
∗ Enlarged view of section B
+0 -2.5
10 1
150 1
E
Approx. 2
Crimping terminal for
6-M12 screws
(100-M12)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 17.4kg
R/L1
R2/
L12
S/L2
S2/
L22
T/L3
T2/
L32
150 1
240 2
Within 240
∗ A
∗ B
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
109 0
2.5
127 2
Within 150
63 2.5
4-M8 hole
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 23kg
158
HC2.book 159 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(2) 400V class
FR-HCL21-H7.5K
50 0.5
7 +1
-0.5
4-M6 hole
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Rating plate
Within 55
Outline dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 4kg
FR-HCL21-H15K
130 2
98 2
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
75 0.5
7 +1
-0.5
4-M6 hole
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Within 65
Rating plate
160 2 124 2
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 6kg
159
6
HC2.book 160 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL21-H30K
75 0.5
7 +1
-0.5
4-M6 hole
R/L1 R2/
L12
S/L2 S2/
L22
T/L3 T2/
L32
Rating plate
Within 95
FR-HCL21-H55K
180 2 99 2
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 9kg
255 1.5
8 0.5
4-M6 hole
R/L1
R2/
L12
S/L2 S2/
L22
T/L3 T2/
L32
Varnish removed area (front/rear side)
(25) Within 70 Within 95
Rating plate
280 2.5
131 2.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 18kg
160
HC2.book 161 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL21-H75K
Rating plate
∗ Enlarged view of section A
∗ Enlarged view of section B
T2
L32
E
75 1
7 1
Crimping terminal for
6-M10 screws
(60-M10)
Approx. 20
FR-HCL21-H110K
R/L1
R2/
L12
S/L2
S2/
L22
T/L3
T2/
L32
75 1
205 2
Within 210
∗ A
∗ B
4-M6 hole
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
Approx. 9
25
Within 145
105 +0
-2.5
127 2
63 2.5
Rating plate
∗ Enlarged view of section A
T2
L32
∗ Enlarged view of section B
E
10 1
150 1
Approx. 2
Crimping terminal for
6-M12 screws
(100-M12)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 20kg
R/L1
R2/
L12
S/L2
S2/
L22
T/L3
T2/
L32
150 1
240 2
Within 240
4-M8 hole
∗
A
∗ B
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
Approx. 9
25
99 +0
-5
117 2
Within 155
Within
65
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 28kg
161
6
HC2.book 162 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL21-H160K
150 1
4-oval-shaped hole 10 18 for M8 screw
0 -5
Rating plate
R/L1
R2/L12
S/L2
S2/L22
T/L3
T2/L32
Crimping terminal for M12 screws
4 - 20 hole
220 2
Within 280
FR-HCL21-H220K
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
Within 185
176 3
170 1 4-oval-shaped hole 12 22 for M10 screw
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 45kg
162
Crimping terminal for M12 screws
4 - 24 hole
Rating plate
R/1
R2/L12
S/2
S2/L22
T/3
T2/L32
270 2
Within 330
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw) Within 200
176 3
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 63kg
HC2.book 163 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HCL21-H280K
Rating plate
Outline dimensions
∗ Enlarged view of section A
∗ Enlarged view of section B
T2
L32
170 1
E
Approx. 25
Crimping terminal for 6-M12 screws (200-M12)
4-
φ
24 hanging hole.
R/L1
R2/
L12
S/L2 T/L3
S2/
L22
170 1
270 2
Within 330
T2/
L32
∗ A
∗ B
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
4-M10 hole
FR-HCL21-H400K
300 5
180 5
60 5
R/L1 R2/L12 S/L2 S2/L22 T/L3 T2/L32
4-M10 eyebolt
R, S, T side
40
Within 205
203
0
5
230 2
115 1 for M12 bolt
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 80kg
R2, S2, T2 side
25
A 250 1
400 2
E
Enlarged drawing of section A
250 1
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
Within
100
4-Installation hole
(12 22 oval-shaped hole)
For M10 bolt
40
305 10
340 10
Within
100
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 121kg
163
6
HC2.book 164 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL21-H560K
4-M10 eyebolt
350 5
210 5
70 5
R/L1 R2/L12 S/L2 S2/L22 T/L3 T2/L32
Enlarged drawing of section A
E
7
Approx. 3
300 1
A
300 1
450 2
R, S, T side
6-terminal for M12 bolt
R2, S2, T2 side
25 40
Rating plate
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
4-Installation hole
Within 120
(15 27 oval-shaped hole) 1
For M12 bolt
50
355 10
395 10
Within 120
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 190kg
164
HC2.book 165 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
6.3.3
Reactor 2 (FR-HCL22)
Check that the capacity of the reactor 2 is same as the capacity of the converter.
(1) 200V class
FR-HCL22-7.5K
Outline dimensions
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Varnish removed area (front side)
MAX 140
(70)
N.P
UL mark
PL
N.P
210 1.5
235 2.5
4-M6 hole
110 1.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 9.8kg
FR-HCL22-15K, 30K
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Varnish removed area (front side)
(D2)
MAX D
N.P
UL mark
PL
N.P
Model
FR-HCL22-15K
FR-HCL22-30K
W
255
340
W1 1.5
W 2.5
W1
230
310
H
260
305
D1 1.5
4-d hole
D
165
180
D1
120
130
D2
75
80 d
M6
M8
Mass
19kg
36kg
(Unit: mm)
165
6
HC2.book 166 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL22-55K
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
430 2.5
Varnish removed area (front side)
(140)
MAX 280
N.P
UL mark
PL
N.P
FR-HCL22-75K
270 1.5
4-M8 hole
240 1.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 65kg
R3/
L13
N.P
S3/
L23
UL mark
PL
N.P
T3/
L33
Varnish removed area (front side)
MAX 280
(190)
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
430 2
470 4
T4/
L34
4-M12 hole
130 2
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 98kg
166
HC2.book 167 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(2) 400V class
FR-HCL22-H7.5K
210 1.5
4-M6 hole
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
Varnish removed area (front/rear side) (25)
Rating plate
8 0.5
MAX 70 MAX 70
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL22-H15K
235 2.5
230 1.5
4-M6 hole
8 0.5
129 2.5
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Varnish removed area (front/rear side) (25)
Rating plate
MAX 75 MAX 90
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 9.8kg
255 2.5
140 2.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 19kg
167
6
HC2.book 168 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL22-H30K
310 1.5
4-M8 hole 10 0.5
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Varnish removed area (front/rear side) (30)
Rating plate
MAX 80 MAX 100
340 2.5
FR-HCL22-H55K
4-M8 hole
360 1.5
10 0.5
153 2.5
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Varnish removed area (front/rear side) (30)
Rating plate
MAX 90 MAX 110
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 36kg
390 2.5
160 2.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 65kg
168
HC2.book 169 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HCL22-H75K
Outline dimensions
N.P
UL mark
PL
N.P
MAX 430
(40) Varnish removed area (front side)
MAX 280
(160)
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
265 1.5
4-M10 ( φ 12 0.5) hole
FR-HCL22-H110K
(Recommended installation 200)
200 1.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 120kg
N.P
UL mark
PL
N.P
MAX 500
(50)
Varnish removed area (front side)
MAX 370
(215)
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
350 1.5
4-M10 ( 12 0.5) hole
(Recommended installation 260)
260 1.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 175kg
6
169
HC2.book 170 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL22-H160K, H220K
N.P
ULmark
PL
N.P
(75) Varnish removed area
(front side)
MAX D
MAX D2
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
Model
FR-HCL22-H160K
FR-HCL22-H220K
400 1.5
MAX W
W
560
620
H
520
620
4-M12 ( 15 0.5) hole
H1
6
9
D
430
480
D1
290
320
(Recommended installation D1)
D1 1.5
D2
255
290
G
52
50
Mass
250kg
345kg
(Unit: mm)
FR-HCL22-H280K
N.P
UL mark
PL
N.P
50
Varnish removed area
(front side)
MAX 560
(355)
R3/
L13
R4/
L14
S3/
L23
S4/
L24
T3/
L33
T4/
L34
500 2
MAX 690
4-M12 ( 12 0.5) hole
(Recommended installation 350)
350 2
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 450kg
170
HC2.book 171 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCL22-H400K
500 5
300 5
100 5
R3/L13 R4/L14 S3/L23 S4/L24 T3/L33 T4/L34
4-M12 eyebolt
R3, S3, T3 side
2- 15 hole for M12 screw
25
R4, S4, T4 side
A 400 2
630 2
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
Within
100
4-Installation hole
(15-25 oval-shaped hole)
For M12 bolt
75
435 10
495 10
Within
100
E
Enlarged drawing of section A
400 2
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 391kg
FR-HCL22-H560K
Enlarged drawing of section A
E
7
Approx. 3
400 2
A
4-M12 eyebolt
500 5
300 5
100 5
R3/L13 R4/L14 S3/L23 S4/L24 T3/L33 T4/L34
400 2
630 2
R3, S3, T3 side
6-terminal
2- 15 hole
25
Rating plate
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
Within 100
4-Installation hole
(15-25 oval-shaped hole) 1
For M12 bolt
75
475 10
535 10
R4, S4, T4 side
Within 100
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 507kg
171
6
HC2.book 172 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
6.3.4
Difference between the reactor 1 (FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22).
Each reactor has a rating plate. Identify the reactor 1 and the reactor 2 by their rating plates. Incorrect connection order of the reactor 1 and the reactor 2 causes the reactors to heat up, and it is dangerous. Take caution to avoid the danger.
[Rating plate]
Reactor 1(FR-HCL21)
AC REACTOR
MODEL
FR-HCL21-XXX
SERIAL XXXXX
Check "MODEL" on the rating plates of the reactor 1
(FR-HCL21) and the reactor 2 (FR-HCL22).
MODEL
FR-HCL22-XXX
SERIAL XXXXX
Reactor 2(FR-HCL22)
AC REACTOR
6.3.5
Outside box (FR-HCB2)
(1) Outline drawing
200V class
FR-HCB2-7.5K, 15K
2-A hole
7
130
190
Rating plate
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
165
2.3
160
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 7kg
172
HC2.book 173 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HCB2-30K, 55K
2-A hole
Outline dimensions
FR-HCB2-75K
3-A hole
7
200
270
240
Rating plate
Type A hole dimensions
7
203
2.3
Model
FR-HCB2-30K
FR-HCB2-55K
13
Mass
11kg
13kg
(Unit: mm)
4φ 16 hole
7
175
400
175
340
250
2.3
Rating plate
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 27kg
173
6
HC2.book 174 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
400V class
FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K
2-A hole
130
7
130
190
165
2.3
Rating plate
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 8kg
FR-HCB2-H55K
2-A hole
200
174
7
200
270
240
Rating plate 203
2.3
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 16kg
HC2.book 175 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HCB2-H75K
2-A hole 250
Outline dimensions
FR-HCB2-H110K
7
250
300
270
3-A hole
2.3
250
Rating plate
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 16kg
4φ 16 hole
7
125
350
125
Rating plate 380
2.3
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 37kg
175
6
HC2.book 176 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCB2-H160K, H220K
3-A hole 175 175 4φ 16 hole
7
175
400
175
340
Rating plate
440
2.3
20
Type A hole dimensions
7
13
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 54kg
176
HC2.book 177 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
(2) Terminal block
200V class
FR-HCB2-7.5K, 15K
FR-HCB2-30K, 55K
S2/L22
S2/L22
R2/L12 T2/L32
R2/L12 T2/L32
MC
MC
R3/L13 T3/L33
R3/L13
S3/L23
T3/L33
S3/L23
Earth (ground) terminal
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
TB1-2 TB1-1
<Terminal screw size>
Model MC TB1-1 TB1-2
FR-HCB2-7.5K, 15K M5 M3.5
M3.5
Earth (ground) terminal
M5
Earth (ground) terminal
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
TB1-2 TB1-1
<Terminal screw size>
Model
FR-HCB2-30K
FR-HCB2-55K
MC TB1-1 TB1-2
M6 M3.5
M8 M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
Earth (ground) terminal
M6
M6
FR-HCB2-75K
R2/L12 S2/L22 T2/L32
MC
TB1-2 TB1-1
R3/L13 S3/L23
<Terminal screw size>
T3/L33
Earth
(ground) terminal
ROH1 ROH2
Model
FR-HCB2-75K
MC TB1-1 TB1-2
M12 M3.5
M3.5
88R 88S
Earth (ground) terminal
M10
177
6
HC2.book 178 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
400V class
FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K
S2/L22
R2/L12 T2/L32
FR-HCB2-H55K
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
MC
MC
R3/L13
S3/L23
T3/L33
R3/L13
S3/L23
T3/L33
Earth
ROH1 ROH2
(ground) terminal
TB1-2
<Terminal screw size>
88R 88S
TB1-1
Model MC TB1-1 TB1-2
M3.5
Earth
(ground) terminal
M5 FR-HCB2-H7.5K to H30K M5 M3.5
FR-HCB2-H75K
S2 ／ L22
ROH1 ROH2
Earth
(ground) terminal
<Terminal screw size>
TB1-2
88R 88S
TB1-1
Model
FR-HCB2-H55K
FR-HCB2-H110K
R2/L12 S2/L22
M8
T2/L32
MC TB1-1 TB1-2
M3.5
M3.5
Earth
(ground) terminal
M6
R2 ／ L12 T2 ／ L32
TB2
MC
TB1-2 TB1-1
TB3
R3 ／ L13 T3 ／ L33
S3 ／ L23
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
ROH1 ROH2
TB1-2
88R 88S
TB1-1
Earth (ground) terminal
<Terminal screw size>
Model MC TB1-1 TB1-2
FR-HCB2-H75K M8 M3.5
M3.5
Earth (ground) terminal
M8
178
R3/L13 S3/L23 T3/L33 Earth
(ground) terminal
<Terminal screw size>
Model
FR-HCB2-H110K
TB2,
TB3
M10
TB1-1 TB1-2
M3.5
M3.5
Earth (ground) terminal
M10
HC2.book 179 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
FR-HCB2-H160K, H220K
R2/L12 T2/L32
S2/L22
Outline dimensions
MC
TB1-2 TB1-1
ROH1 ROH2 88R 88S
S3/L23
R3/L13
<Terminal screw size>
T3/L33
Model
FR-HCB2-H160K, 220K
Earth
(ground) terminal
MC TB1-1 TB1-2
M12 M3.5
M3.5
Earth
(ground) terminal
M10
6.3.6
Filter capacitor (FR-HCC2)
FR-HCC2-H280K
300
90 5 90 5
2-15 20 oval-shaped hole
365 3
400 3
370 3
394 3
Enlarged drawing of the installation foot
(Recommended bolt size: M12)
370 3
394 3
R7.5
(25)
80 2
Earth (ground) terminal
(M8 bolt)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 17kg
179
6
HC2.book 180 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
FR-HCC2-H400K
400 3
365 3
2-15 20 oval-shaped hole
M12 screws
52.5
102.5
300
90 5 90 5 M12 bolt
370 3
394 3
Installation foot
Earth (ground)
terminal (M8 bolt) 80 2
Enlarged drawing of the installation foot
(Recommended bolt size: M12)
R7.5
370 3
394 3
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 15kg
FR-HCC2-H560K
500 3
140 5
400
140 5
M12 bolt
Enlarged drawing of the installation foot
(Recommended bolt size: M12)
R7.5
470 2
494 3
2-15 20 oval-shaped hole
Earth (ground)
terminal (M8 bolt)
470 2
494 3
80 2
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 21kg
180
HC2.book 181 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
Filter capacitor alarm detector (MDA-1) (FR-HCC2-H400K, H560K)
150 3 arm
Reference value as some margins are taken for the arm
Switch terminal and contact symbol of the detector
2 1
NC
NO
NC
NO
3 4
NO4
NC1 NC2
NO3
Circuit diagram
4-M4 5.6
Screw with toothed washer
40 2
15 1
6.3.7
FR-HCM2
Contactor (S-N600FXYS AC210V 2A2B) (FR-HCM2-H280K)
M16 screw
(with washer and spring washer)
13.5
20
263
250
Case Plunger
4
1
3
2
Micro switch
Screw(M4)
Connector
53 2
65MAX
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.3kg
156
M4 screw
(self-up)
Installation hole for 4-M10 screw
80
70
290
40
12 hole 10 235
10.5
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 24kg
181
6
HC2.book 182 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
Contactor (S-N400FXYS AC200V 2A2B) (FR-HCM2-H400K, H560K)
(4-M8 hole)
145
(60)
M4 screw (self-up)
4-M8 hole
136
M12 screw
(with washer and spring washer)
55
30
163
M4 screw
(self-up) 1 195
3.2
MC power supply stepdown transformer (BKO-CA2001H06) (FR-HCM2-H280K to H560K)
Enlarged drawing of installation hole
Terminal block for tap switching
M4 screw
Input side terminal block
M4 screw
R/L1 S/L2
V3 V3 V2 V2 V1 V1
7 18 or more
Output side terminal block
M4 screw
R5/L15 S5/L25
Output side
5 2
100 1
E
Varnish removed area
8 1
Input side
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 9.5kg
100 1
153 2
4- 8 open hole for M6 bolt
Terminal block (TS-807BXC-5P) (FR-HCM2-H280K)
128
116
(30)
81 2
115 2
Within 180
3 17.5
2.5
20
X
X
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 10kg
37
12
26
Sectional view of X - X
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.3kg
182
HC2.book 183 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Terminal block shorting conductor (C152C481H21) (FR-HCM2-H280K)
(8)
5-oval 7-8
8 80 0.4
60 0.4
40 0.4
20 0.3
(4) 16 (4) (2.3) 2.8
A
10-C2
Outline dimensions
A
28
96
40
2-C2
MC shorting conductor (C152C423H21) (FR-HCM2-H400K, H560K)
7.9
30
Sectional view of A - A
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.1kg
4- 14 hole (M12)
57.5
65
180
(57.5)
9-M5 screw for installation of inrush resistor
8
Buffer relay for driving MCs (SR-N4FX AC210V 4A) (FR-HCM2-H280K to H560K)
4.5
2 M4 hole
35(Installation size)
A2 A1
(self-up)
59
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 1.6kg
13 23 33 43
14 24 34 44
10
43
8
5 78
IEC
35mm width rail
10
3.5
(When rail width is 7.5mm)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.3kg
183
6
HC2.book 184 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
Mini relay for filter capacitor alarm detector (MYQ4Z AC200/220) (FR-HCM2-H400K, H560K)
2.6
21.5 or less
14φ 1.2 2.2 oval hole
6.4
28 or less 28 or less
35.5 or less
Mini relay terminal block (PYF14T) (FR-HCM2-H400K, H560K)
21.5 or less
2-
φ
4.2 5 hole
33 or lower
7 0.2
30
23.5
11.5
11
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 35kg
17.4
14-M3.5 8 10
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 53kg
184
HC2.book 185 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
6.3.8
Inrush current limit resistor (FR-HCR2)
With thermostat (BKO-CA1996H31) (FR-HCR2-H280K to H560K)
2-(17)
215 2
200 1.2
175 2
2-500 10
325 15
2-6 1
2-6 1
Board thickness2.5
Without thermostat (BKO-CA1996H21) (FR-HCR2-H280K to H560K)
2-(17)
215 2
200 1.2
175 2
2-500 10
2-6 1
60 1.5
(30)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.8kg
Board thickness2.5
60 1.5
(30)
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.8kg
185
6
HC2.book 186 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Outline dimensions
6.3.9
Parameter unit
Operation panel (FR-DU07-CNV)
[Outline drawing]
3.2max
3 72
78
81
3 16
25
2-M3 screw
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
[Outline drawing]
(14.2)
83
∗1
25.05
(11.45)
∗1
[Enclosure cut dimension drawing]
FR-DU07-CNV
21
Panel
27.8
72
Air- bleeding hole
20
Parameter unit connection cable(FR-CB2 )(option)
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP option)
(Unit: mm)
[Enclosure cut dimension drawing]
40 40
Air-bleeding hole
4-R1
∗1
∗1
80.3
26.5
26.5
4-
φ
4 hole
(Effective depth of the installation screws hole 5.0)
M3 screw
∗2
When mounting FR-PU07 to an enclosure, etc., remove the screws used for mounting to the converter, or use M3 nut to securely mount the FR-PU07.
Select the installation screw whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screw hole.
(Unit: mm)
Parameter unit with battery pack (option)(FR-PU07BB)
83
<Outline drawing>
18
8.2
46.7
44.7
(Unit: mm)
186
HC2.book 187 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
APPENDICES
This chapter provides the "APPENDICES" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Appendix 1 Instruction code list........................................................... 188
Appendix 2 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives....... 189
Appendix 3 Instructions for UL and cUL ............................................. 191
187
HC2.book 188 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
188
Appendix 1 Instruction code list
These instruction codes are used to write or read parameters through the RS-485 communication and the CC-Link communication.
(Refer to
for the RS-485 communication . Refer to
page 109 for the CC-Link communication
.
)
" " indicates valid and " " indicates invalid of "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
These parameters are not cleared by the parameter clear (all parameter clear) command, which are sent through RS-485 communication and CC-Link communication. (Refer to
for the RS-485 communication . Refer to
for the CC-Link communication .
)
Read and write of this parameter is enabled only when communicating through the PU connector.
Symbols in the table indicate parameters that function when the option is mounted.
...... FR-A7NC
Instruction
Code
Instruction
Code
Parameter
Pr.
Name
Pr.
Name
0 Simple mode selection
1 Maximum power supply frequency
2 Minimum power supply frequency
3 ROH terminal function selection
4 SOF terminal function selection
5 X1 terminal function selection
6 X2 terminal function selection
7 RES terminal function selection
8 SOF input selection
9 OH input selection
10 RDY signal logic selection
11 RSO terminal function selection
12 CVO terminal function selection
13 Y1 terminal function selection
14 Y2 terminal function selection
15 Y3 terminal function selection
16 ABC terminal function selection
22 Current limit level
23 Current limit level (regenerative)
24 OL signal output timer
10 90
16 96
17 97
18 98
0
0
0
0
25 Input current detection level 19 99 0
26 Input current detection signal delay time 1A 9A 0
27
Input current detection signal retention time
1B 9B 0
28 Input current detection operation selection 1C 9C 0
29 Zero current detection level
30 Zero current detection time
31 Life alarm status display
32 Inrush current limit circuit life display
33 Control circuit capacitor life display
34 Maintenance timer
21 A1 0
22 A2 0
35 Maintenance timer alarm output set time 23 A3 0
36
44
Cooling fan operation selection
Instantaneous power failure detection signal clear
45 AM output filter
24 A4 0
2C AC 0
2D AD 0
46 Watt-hour meter clear
47 Energization time carrying-over times
48
49
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
Power supply frequency monitoring reference
50 AM terminal function selection
1D 9D 0
1E 9E 0
1F 9F 0
20 A0 0
2E AE 0
2F AF 0
30 B0
31 B1
0
0
51
52
53
54
Input power monitoring reference
DU/PU main display data selection
Input voltage monitoring reference
FM terminal function selection
32 B2 0
33 B3 0
34 B4 0
35 B5 0
36 B6 0
00 80 0
01 81 0
02 82 0
03 83 0
04 84 0
05 85 0
06 86 0
07 87 0
08 88 0
09 89 0
0A 8A 0
0B 8B 0
0C 8C 0
0D 8D 0
0E 8E 0
0F 8F 0
55 Bus voltage monitoring reference
56 Current monitoring reference
57 Restart selection
58 Free parameter 1
59 Free parameter 2
61 Key lock operation selection
65 Retry selection
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence
68 Retry waiting time
69 Retry count display erase
75
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Parameter write selection
80 Voltage control proportional gain
81 Voltage control integral gain
82 Current control proportional gain
83 Current control integral gain
117 PU communication station number
118 PU communication speed
119 PU communication stop bit length
37 B7
38 B8
39 B9
0
0
0
3A BA 0
3B BB 0
3D BD 0
41 C1
43 C3
44 C4
45 C5
0
0
0
0
4B CB 0
4D CD 0
50 D0
51 D1
52 D2
53 D3
11 91
12 92
13 93
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
120 PU communication parity check
121 Number of PU communication retries
123 PU communication waiting time setting
124 PU communication CR/LF selection
14 94
15 95
17 97
18 98
1
1
1
1
145 PU display language selection 2D AD 1
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 2A AA 3
Communication error execution waiting
500 time
00 80 5
501
502
Communication error occurrence count display
Stop mode selection at communication error
Communication station number (CC-Link)
01 81
02 82
5
5
542 2A AA 5
543 Baud rate (CC-Link)
544 CC-Link extended setting
C0
(900)
C1
(901)
FM terminal calibration
AM terminal calibration
989 Parameter copy alarm release
990 PU buzzer control
991 PU contrast adjustment
2B AB 5
2C AC 5
5C DC 1
5D DD 1
59 D9 9
5A DA 9
5B DB 9
HC2.book 189 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Appendix 2 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives
The EU Directives are issued to standardize different national regulations of the EU Member States and to facilitate free movement of the equipment, whose safety is ensured, in the EU territory.
Since 1996, compliance with the EMC Directive that is one of the EU Directives has been legally required. Since 1997, compliance with the Low Voltage Directive, another EU Directive, has been also legally required. When a manufacturer confirms its equipment to be compliant with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, the manufacturer must declare the conformity and affix the CE marking.
The authorized representative in the EU
The authorized representative in the EU is shown below.
Name: Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.
Address: Gothaer Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany
Note
We declare that this converter, when equipped with the dedicated EMC filter, conforms with the EMC Directive in industrial environments and affix the CE marking on the inverter.
When using the inverter in a residential area, take appropriate measures and ensure the conformity of the inverter used in the residential area.
(1) EMC Directive
We declare that this converter, when equipped with the EMC Directive compliant EMC filter, conforms with the EMC
Directive and affix the CE marking on the inverter (except the single-phase 100V power supply model).
EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC
Standard(s): EN61800-3:2004 (Second environment / PDS Category "C3")
Note: First environment
Environment including residential buildings. Includes building directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Second environment
Environment including all buildings except buildings directly connected without a transformer to the lower voltage power supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Note
Set the EMC Directive compliant EMC filter to the converter. Use a recommended EMC compliant EMC filter shown in the table below. Insert line noise filters and ferrite cores to the power and control cables as required.
Recommended EMC compliant EMC filter (Manufactured by: SOSHIN ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.)
200V class
Converter model
EMC compliant
EMC filter
FR-HC2-7.5K
HF3040C-UQC
FR-HC2-15K
HF3080C-UQC
FR-HC2-30K
NF3150A-VZ
FR-HC2-55K
NF3250C-VZ
FR-HC2-75K
NF3300C-VZ
400V class
Converter model FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K FR-HC2-H30K FR-HC2-H55K FR-HC2-H75K
EMC compliant
EMC filter
HF3040C-SZC-
48DDD
HF3040C-SZC-
48DDD
HF3080C-SZC-
48EDE
TF3150C-TX TF3150C-TX
Converter model FR-HC2-H110K FR-HC2-H160K FR-HC2-H220K FR-HC2-H280K FR-HC2-H400K FR-HC2-H560K
EMC compliant
NF3250C-UQA NF3300C-SDK NF3400C-SDK NF3600C-SDK NF3800C-SDK NF31000C-SDK
EMC filter
Connect the converter to an earthed power supply.
Install a motor, the EMC Directive compliant EMC filter, and a control cable according to the instructions written in the
EMC Installation Guidelines (BCN-A21041-204).
Confirm that the final integrated system with the inverter conforms with the EMC Directive.
Mount the converter (including all peripheral devices such as outside box, reactor 1, and reactor 2) to the enclosure panel of IP54 or higher.
189
HC2.book 190 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
(2) Low Voltage Directive
We have self-confirmed our converters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive (Conforming standard EN
61800-5-1) and affix the CE marking on the converters.
Outline of instructions
Do not use an earth leakage circuit breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth.
Connect the equipment to the earth securely.
Wire the earth (ground) terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
Use the cable sizes on
under the following conditions.
Surrounding air temperature: 40°C maximum
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to EN60204 ANNEX C TABLE 5.
Use a tinned (plating should not include zinc) crimping terminal to connect the earth cable. When tightening the screw, be careful not to damage the threads.
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable on
Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.
When using an earth leakage circuit breaker, use a residual current operated protective device (RCD) of type B (breaker which can detect both AC and DC). If not, provide double or reinforced insulation between the converter and other equipment, or put a transformer between the main power supply and converter.
Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II (usable regardless of the earth (ground) condition of the power supply), overvoltage category III (usable with the earthed-neutral system power supply, 400V class only) specified in IEC664.
Mount the converter (including all peripheral devices such as outside box, reactor 1, and reactor 2) to the enclosure panel of IP54 or higher.
On the input and output of the converter, use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A, B, C) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (Relay output has basic isolation from the inverter internal circuit.)
Control circuit terminals on
are safely isolated from the main circuit.
Environment
Running In Storage During Transportation
Surrounding air temperature
Humidity
Maximum Altitude
-10°C to +50°C
90% RH or less
1000m
-20°C to +65°C
90% RH or less
1000m
-20°C to +65°C
90% RH or less
10000m
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales representative.
Provide the Class T fuse or a fuse with faster shutoff speed, which is UL and cUL listed, for branch circuit protection.
Converter model Fuse type Cat. No Manufacturer Rating
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H160K
FR-HC2-H220K
FR-HC2-H280K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HC2-H560K
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
170M1414
170M1416
170M2666
170M2669
170M2671
170M1411
170M1414
170M1416
170M2666
170M2667
170M2669
170M2671
170M3122
170M4117
170M5116
170M6117
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
50A, 700 Vac
80A, 700 Vac
160A, 700 Vac
315A, 700 Vac
400A, 700 Vac
25A, 700 Vac
50A, 700 Vac
80A, 700 Vac
160A, 700 Vac
200A, 700 Vac
315A, 700 Vac
400A, 700 Vac
550A, 700 Vac
700A, 700 Vac
1000A, 700 Vac
1400A, 700 Vac
190
HC2.book 191 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Appendix 3 Instructions for UL and cUL
(Standard to comply with: UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No. 14)
(1) General Precaution
The bus capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than 10 minutes, and check for residual voltage between terminal P/+ and N/- with a meter etc., to avoid a hazard of electrical shock.
(2) Environment
Before installation, check that the environment meets following specifications.
Enclosure
Surrounding air temperature
-10°C to + 50°C Maximum
(non-freezing)
High power factor converter
Measurement position
5cm 5cm
5cm
Measurement position
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Ambience
Altitude, vibration
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to + 65°C
Indoors (No corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)
Below 1000m, 5.9m/s 2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Surrounding Air Temperature is a temperature measured at a measurement position in an enclosure. Ambient Temperature is a temperature outside an enclosure.
2.9m/s
2
or less for the 160K or higher
(3) Installation
High power factor converter (FR-HC2) and its accessories are open type devices which must be installed inside a separate and suitable Type 1 enclosure along with the external components (Input reactors, Magnetic Contactor, Pre-Charge
Resistor, Capacitors and Transformer).
Make the necessary wiring connections in accordance with the NEC for installations in North America, CEC for Canada and any applicable local codes.
For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical
Code and any applicable provincial codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
Provide the appropriate fuse in accordance with the table below.
Converter model Fuse type Cat. No Manufacturer Rating
FR-HC2-7.5K
UL Recognized High Speed 170M1414 Bussmann 50A, 700 Vac
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H160K
FR-HC2-H220K
FR-HC2-H280K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HC2-H560K
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
UL Recognized High Speed
170M1416
170M2666
170M2669
170M2671
170M1411
170M1414
170M1416
170M2666
170M2667
170M2669
170M2671
170M3122
170M4117
170M5116
170M6117
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
80A, 700 Vac
160A, 700 Vac
315A, 700 Vac
400A, 700 Vac
25A, 700 Vac
50A, 700 Vac
80A, 700 Vac
160A, 700 Vac
200A, 700 Vac
315A, 700 Vac
400A, 700 Vac
550A, 700 Vac
700A, 700 Vac
1000A, 700 Vac
1400A, 700 Vac
Due to Type 1 enclosure variables of size, cooling fans, ventilation and location, be sure to monitor the surrounding air temperature of the converter to not exceed 50 C. Use additional cooling means as necessary.
Install all appended accessories inside the enclosure.
191
HC2.book 192 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
Minimum spacing distances inside the enclosure are as follows.
500mm or more
500mm or more
500mm or more
100mm or more
Converter
(FR-HC2)
100mm or more
100mm or more
Outside box
(FR-HCB2) 100mm or more
500mm or more
500mm or more
100mm or more
Input reactor
1, 2
(FR-HCL21,
FR-HCL22)
100mm or more
(4) Wiring to the power supply and the motor
(1) Wiring the converter with the inverter
Use the UL listed copper stranded wire (rated at 75°C) for wiring between the inverter and the converter (P and N), and between the converter and input reactor (R4, S4, T4). When wiring to the terminals, refer to the following table, and use the UL listed crimp ring terminal employing insulation tubing. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer.
Converter model
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H160K
FR-HC2-H220K
FR-HC2-H280K
FR-HC2-H400K
FR-HC2-H560K
M8
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M5
M6
M8/M10
M12
M12
M5
M5
M6
Main Circuit-
Terminal
Screw Size
Recommended Criming
Terminal by JST Mfg.
Co., Ltd.
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
T4/L34
8-5
P/+, N/-
22-6
60-8
150-12
150-12
5.5-5
5.5-5
22-6
60-8
38-10
60-10
100-12
150-12
200-12
8-5
22-6
60-10
150-12
150-12
2-5
5.5-5
14-6
38-6
38-10
60-10
150-12
100-12
150-12
RD200-12 RD200-12
RD325-12 RD325-12
Recommended Tool by JST
Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Terminal crimping tool
Crimping head
Tightening-
Torque (N m)
YF-1, E-4
YET-150-1
YET-300-1,
YET-300N
7.8
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
2.5
4.4
7.8/14.7
24.5
24.5
2.5
2.5
4.4
(2) The FR-HCB2 Series unit is a UL Listed Accessory for use only with the following converter.
FR-HCB2 Series unit
FR-HCB2-7.5K
FR-HCB2-15K
FR-HCB2-30K
Applicable Converter
FR-HC2-7.5K
FR-HC2-15K
FR-HC2-30K
FR-HCB2-55K
FR-HCB2-75K
FR-HCB2-H7.5K
FR-HCB2-H15K
FR-HCB2-H30K
FR-HCB2-H55K
FR-HCB2-H75K
FR-HCB2-H110K
FR-HCB2-H160K
FR-HCB2-H220K
FR-HC2-55K
FR-HC2-75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K
FR-HC2-H15K
FR-HC2-H30K
FR-HC2-H55K
FR-HC2-H75K
FR-HC2-H110K
FR-HC2-H160K
FR-HC2-H220K
4
1
1
1/0
4/0
300
400
2 400
3 600
Cable Size
AWG or kcmil for R4,
S4, T4, P, N terminals
R4/L14,
S4/L24,
T4/L34
8
P/+, N/-
8
4
1/0
4
1/0
300
300
12
10
300
300
14
10
6
2
1
2/0
250
2 250
2 300
2 400
3 600
192
HC2.book 193 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
MEMO
193
HC2.book 194 ページ ２０１２年１１月１９日 月曜日 午前１０時５２分
REVISIONS
Print Date
Aug. 2009
Jan. 2010
Jul. 2010
Sep. 2011
Mar. 2012
Nov. 2012
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Manual Number
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-A First edition
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-B
Revision
Modification
Compatibility with FR-A7NC
Additional peripheral devices
Inrush current limit resistor (with thermostat) (partial change)
Buffer relay (SR-N4FX AC210V 4A)
Mini relay for filter capacitor alarm detector (MYQ4Z AC200/220)
Mini relay terminal block (PYF14T)
Mini relay clip (PYC-A1)
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-C
Addition
FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K
Pr. 44 Instantaneous power failure detection signal clear
Monitored item: input power (with regenerative display)
Output signal: Instantaneous power failure detection hold (Y16)
Modification
Fuse selection
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-D
Addition
FR-HC2-H75K, H110K, H280K
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-E
Addition
FR-HC2-H7.5K to H55K
FR-HC2-H160K, H220K
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-F
Addition
FR-HC2-H400K
For Maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi converters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product are likely to cause a serious accident.
194
BCN-C22005-661.fm 1 ページ ２０１３年８月２９日 木曜日 午後１時２２分
Additional notes for Instructions for UL and cUL
General precaution
CAUTION - Risk of Electric Shock -
The bus capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than 10 minutes.
ATTENTION - Risque de choc électrique -
La durée de décharge du condensateur de bus est de 10 minutes.
Avant de commencer le câblage ou l’inspection, mettez l’appareil hors tension et attendez plus de 10 minutes.
1/1 BCN-C22005-661
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
IB(NA)-0600381ENG-F (1211)MEE Printed in Japan
Specifications subject to change without notice.
F
INVERTER
FR-HC2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
High power factor converter
FR-HC2-7.5K to 75K
FR-HC2-H7.5K to H560K
MON
P.CPY
REGEN
PWR
DRIVE
PSCLR
MODE
SET STOP
RESET
OUTLINE
INSTALLATION AND
WIRING
PARAMETERS
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
4
5
6
1
2
3
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement